1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
149 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
203 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
494 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
501 \begin_inset Index idx
504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
505 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
513 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
524 \begin_layout Chapter
525 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
529 \begin_layout Section
530 Basic File Operations
531 \begin_inset Index idx
534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
543 \begin_layout Standard
548 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
549 in addition to some more advanced operations:
552 \begin_layout Itemize
574 \begin_layout Itemize
590 arg "buffer-new-template"
596 \begin_layout Itemize
618 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
642 \begin_layout Itemize
664 \begin_layout Itemize
676 arg "buffer-write-as"
682 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \begin_layout Standard
711 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
712 a few minor differences.
715 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
726 command lists the available templates.
727 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
728 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
729 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
737 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
744 \begin_layout Standard
745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
777 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
778 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
779 is just that — a big, blank space.
787 \begin_layout Standard
808 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
813 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
816 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
834 will reload the document from disk.
835 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
836 and want to restore it to the last save.
845 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
846 them as your changes.
849 \begin_layout Section
850 Basic Editing Features
851 \begin_inset Index idx
854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
863 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
870 \begin_layout Standard
871 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
872 can perform cut and paste operations
873 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
874 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
875 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
876 editing features and how to access
878 We will start with cut and paste.
881 \begin_layout Standard
882 As you might expect, the
886 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
887 various other editing features.
888 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
892 \begin_layout Itemize
898 \begin_inset Index idx
901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1002 \begin_layout Itemize
1006 \begin_inset space ~
1012 \begin_layout Itemize
1016 \begin_inset space ~
1022 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1036 \begin_inset Index idx
1039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1048 \begin_inset Index idx
1051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1066 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1076 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1082 \begin_layout Standard
1083 The first three are self-explanatory.
1084 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1085 and other programs by
1106 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1107 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1112 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1113 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1114 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1115 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1116 into individual cells.
1120 \begin_inset space ~
1125 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1126 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1130 \begin_layout Standard
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1139 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1141 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1143 \begin_inset space ~
1150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1156 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1157 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1158 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 \begin_inset space \space{}
1167 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1168 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1171 \begin_inset space ~
1174 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1184 \begin_inset space ~
1193 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1194 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1196 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1200 \begin_inset space ~
1205 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1206 start a new paragraph.
1207 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1208 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1216 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1233 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 paste from the primary selection.
1237 This is normally the currently selected text.
1240 \begin_layout Standard
1243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1267 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1273 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 button to skip the current word.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1310 If the toggle is set, searching for
1311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1322 will not match the word
1323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1337 Match whole words only
1339 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1340 to only find complete words, e.
1341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1370 offers also an advanced
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 feature that is described in section
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1389 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1397 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1398 \begin_inset space \space{}
1402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1410 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1412 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1417 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1424 \begin_layout Standard
1428 arg "inset-select-all"
1431 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1432 When the cursor is inside an inset
1435 arg "inset-select-all"
1438 selects the content of the inset.
1442 arg "inset-select-all"
1445 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1450 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1453 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1457 \begin_layout Section
1459 \begin_inset Index idx
1462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1469 \begin_inset Index idx
1472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1481 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1488 \begin_layout Standard
1489 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1491 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1497 or the toolbar button
1503 to undo some mistake.
1504 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1509 or the toolbar button
1516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1527 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1540 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1541 This is a consequence of the 100
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 step undo limit mentioned above.
1548 \begin_layout Standard
1557 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1611 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1614 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1615 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1618 \begin_layout Itemize
1619 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1622 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1629 \begin_layout Enumerate
1630 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1635 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1636 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1640 \begin_layout Section
1642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1644 name "sec:Navigating"
1649 \begin_inset Index idx
1652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1661 \begin_layout Standard
1663 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1672 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1676 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1678 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1680 \begin_inset space ~
1685 or by the toolbar button
1688 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1694 \begin_layout Itemize
1695 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1697 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1700 and use the same menu to return to them.
1701 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1704 \begin_layout Standard
1708 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1713 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1716 \begin_inset space ~
1721 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1722 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1723 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1724 your last editing position.
1727 \begin_layout Standard
1732 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1736 \begin_layout Subsection
1738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1740 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1745 \begin_inset Index idx
1748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1749 Navigating ! Outline
1755 \begin_inset Index idx
1758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1769 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1770 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1772 \begin_inset space ~
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1778 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1782 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1794 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1798 \begin_layout Standard
1799 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1800 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1801 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1802 dialog and to modify the citation.
1805 \begin_layout Standard
1810 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1811 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1813 Labels and References
1815 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1824 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1829 you further to control the display.
1834 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1835 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1841 option keeps it in the current view state.
1842 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1843 \begin_inset space ~
1846 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 3, the subsections of sections
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1859 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1864 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1874 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1877 \begin_layout Standard
1884 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1885 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1899 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1900 So, for example, you can move section
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1908 2.4 or after section
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1914 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1927 (or the corresponding key bindings
1935 ) you can change the level of sections.
1936 So you can for example make section
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1953 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1956 \begin_layout Subsection
1957 Horizontal Scrolling
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1972 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1978 \begin_inset space \space{}
1982 \begin_inset space ~
1985 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1986 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1987 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1991 \begin_layout Standard
1992 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1996 \begin_layout Itemize
1998 is used on a small tablet computer
2001 \begin_layout Itemize
2002 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2014 \begin_inset space ~
2027 \begin_layout Itemize
2028 Math constructs with long command names
2031 \begin_layout Standard
2032 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2033 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2035 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2036 windows so that table
2037 \begin_inset space ~
2041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2043 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2048 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2050 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2051 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2054 \begin_layout Standard
2055 \begin_inset Float table
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2071 Horizontal scrolling test.
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 \begin_inset Tabular
2082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_layout Section
2129 Input/Word Completion
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2183 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2186 is used to propose completions.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2234 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2235 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2236 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2237 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2243 completions available.
2248 key to accept a proposed completion.
2249 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2260 ing options for text.
2261 The special math option
2265 enables characters to be composed.
2266 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2267 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2270 , you can then input the characters
2271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 to a formula to get it.
2283 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2284 of the math toolbar.
2285 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2289 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2290 's installation folder.
2291 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2300 \begin_layout Section
2302 \begin_inset Index idx
2305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 \begin_layout Standard
2379 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2393 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2396 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2400 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2407 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2447 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Tabulator key"
2466 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2468 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2482 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2486 , especially section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2493 reference "subsec:Lists"
2499 If you are still confused, look in the
2504 \begin_inset Newline newline
2512 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2513 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2517 \begin_layout Labeling
2518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Escape key"
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2540 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2541 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2544 \begin_layout Labeling
2545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2551 \begin_inset space ~
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2562 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2563 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2567 \begin_layout Standard
2568 There are three modifier keys:
2571 \begin_layout Labeling
2572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2590 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2591 LatexCommand nomenclature
2593 description "Control key"
2598 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2599 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2627 \begin_layout Itemize
2636 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2640 \begin_layout Labeling
2641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Shift key"
2667 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2668 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2671 \begin_layout Labeling
2672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2690 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2691 LatexCommand nomenclature
2693 description "Alt or Meta key"
2698 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2699 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2700 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2706 \begin_inset Newline newline
2709 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2711 menu accelerator keys
2714 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2715 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 For example, the sequence
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2785 manual lists all other things bound to the
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2796 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2797 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2798 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2799 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2800 The \SpecialChar LyX
2801 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2802 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2803 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2805 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2821 followed by a capital
2828 \begin_layout Chapter
2831 \begin_inset Index idx
2834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Section
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2864 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2865 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2866 numbering schemes, and so on.
2867 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2868 and format the title of your document differently.
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2876 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2877 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2878 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2879 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2880 picks one for you by default.
2881 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2884 \begin_layout Subsection
2886 \begin_inset Index idx
2889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2898 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 You can select a class using the
2908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2923 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Article for basic articles
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Report for basic reports
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Book for writing a book
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Letter for US-style letters
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2955 only uses if you have installed
2956 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 distributions will include
2960 Here are some of the classes.
2961 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2963 Special Document Classes
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2976 \begin_layout Description
2977 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2981 \begin_layout Description
2982 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2988 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2989 There are three article layouts available.
2990 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2991 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2992 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2993 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2998 sequential numbering
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3003 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3004 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3005 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Beamer Layout for presentations
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3014 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3015 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3016 with \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3024 \begin_layout Description
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3029 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Foils Used to make transparencies
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3042 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3044 with \SpecialChar LyX
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3050 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3063 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3064 (Is used by this document.)
3067 \begin_layout Description
3068 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3075 \begin_layout Description
3080 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3081 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3083 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Slides Used to make transparencies
3091 \begin_layout Description
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3096 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3097 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3100 \begin_layout Description
3101 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3104 \begin_layout Standard
3105 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3107 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3109 Special Document Classes
3116 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3117 of the document classes.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3150 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3151 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3153 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3159 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3164 , are highly specialized.
3166 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3167 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3168 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3170 by some document class.
3171 There are just too many of them.
3172 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3185 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3186 document class for a new file.
3188 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3191 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 manual for information on how to install them.
3199 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3205 \begin_layout Standard
3206 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3207 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3208 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3209 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 class files to be used for dissertation
3211 s submitted to those universities.
3212 The \SpecialChar LyX
3213 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3215 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3219 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3225 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3232 name "subsec:Modules"
3237 \begin_inset Index idx
3240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3250 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3251 chosen document class.
3252 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3253 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3264 \begin_inset Index idx
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3274 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3279 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3280 packages or file format converters that are not always
3281 installed by default.
3283 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3284 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3285 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3286 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3288 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 file without the missing prerequisites.
3290 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3291 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3298 \begin_inset Index idx
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3308 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3327 will advise you about these things.
3335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3339 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 Document ! Local Layout
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3358 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 : They are intended to be used in
3360 a variety of different documents.
3361 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3362 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3363 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3364 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3365 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3367 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3385 manual for information on how to use it.
3388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3392 \begin_layout Standard
3393 Each class has a default set of options.
3394 Here's a quick table describing them:
3397 \begin_layout Standard
3398 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3404 \begin_layout Standard
3406 \begin_inset Tabular
3407 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3408 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 \begin_layout Standard
3868 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3874 \begin_layout Standard
3875 You're probably also wondering what
3876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3880 \begin_inset space ~
3884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3888 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3889 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3894 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3899 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3909 headings, there are also
3917 headings, and so on.
3918 We will describe these headings fully in section
3919 \begin_inset space ~
3923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3925 reference "subsec:Headings"
3932 \begin_layout Subsection
3934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3936 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3941 \begin_inset Index idx
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3963 \begin_layout Standard
3964 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3973 \begin_inset space ~
3981 \begin_inset space ~
3986 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3988 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3989 doesn't support special options you want to
3990 use for your document.
3991 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3992 -class and its options, you have to read
3996 \begin_layout Standard
4000 \begin_inset space ~
4007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4013 \begin_inset space ~
4018 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4019 You can choose between the following five options:
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 Use default page style of current class.
4031 \begin_layout Labeling
4032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4037 No page numbers or headings.
4040 \begin_layout Labeling
4041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4049 \begin_layout Labeling
4050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4055 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4056 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4057 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4058 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4061 \begin_layout Labeling
4062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4067 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4068 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4074 \begin_inset Index idx
4077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 -packages ! fancyhdr
4085 How they are defined is explained in section
4086 \begin_inset space ~
4090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4092 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4101 \begin_inset space ~
4105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4107 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4114 \begin_layout Subsection
4115 Paper Size and Orientation
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 Document ! Paper size
4126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4128 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4135 \begin_layout Standard
4136 You can find the following options in the menu
4139 \begin_inset space ~
4146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4150 \begin_inset Index idx
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 \begin_layout Labeling
4163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4167 \begin_inset space ~
4172 What size paper to print on.
4177 \begin_layout Itemize
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 US letter, US legal, US executive
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4213 \begin_layout Itemize
4220 \begin_layout Labeling
4221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 To choose whether to output as
4237 \begin_layout Labeling
4238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4248 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4251 \begin_layout Subsection
4253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4255 name "subsec:Margins"
4260 \begin_inset Index idx
4263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4270 \begin_inset Index idx
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 Paper margins are set in the menu
4285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4289 \begin_inset Index idx
4292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4301 \begin_layout Standard
4302 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4303 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4304 the paper format and the font size into account.
4307 \begin_layout Subsection
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4312 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4318 That includes the paragraph environments.
4319 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4320 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4321 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4323 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4332 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4334 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4335 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4336 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4339 \begin_layout Section
4340 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4341 \begin_inset Index idx
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4345 Paragraph ! Indentation
4353 \begin_layout Subsection
4355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4357 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4366 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4371 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4372 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4373 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4377 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4383 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4384 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4385 language than English.
4387 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4390 \begin_layout Standard
4391 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4392 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4393 into \SpecialChar LyX
4395 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4398 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4400 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4401 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4402 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4409 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4410 goes to produce a printable file.
4415 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4417 gives you the ability globally to change
4421 these pre-coded spacings.
4422 We will explain more later.
4425 \begin_layout Subsection
4426 Paragraph Separation
4427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4429 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 Paragraph ! Separation
4446 \begin_layout Standard
4454 \begin_inset space ~
4462 \begin_inset space ~
4469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4473 \begin_inset Index idx
4476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4482 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4485 \begin_layout Subsection
4489 \begin_layout Standard
4490 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4495 \begin_inset space ~
4500 dialog and toggle the
4503 \begin_inset space ~
4508 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4511 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4515 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4516 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4520 \begin_layout Standard
4521 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4522 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4525 \begin_layout Subsection
4527 \begin_inset Index idx
4530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4531 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4546 \begin_inset Index idx
4549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4562 \begin_inset space ~
4571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4572 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4578 \begin_inset Index idx
4581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4583 -packages ! setspace
4588 installed to use this feature.
4593 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4597 \begin_inset space ~
4602 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4603 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4606 \begin_layout Section
4607 Paragraph Environments
4608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4610 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4615 \begin_inset Index idx
4618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4619 Paragraph ! Environments
4625 \begin_inset Index idx
4628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4629 Paragraph environments|(
4637 \begin_layout Subsection
4641 \begin_layout Standard
4642 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4654 } \SpecialChar ldots
4664 \begin_inset Newline newline
4667 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4670 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4671 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4680 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4683 \begin_layout Standard
4684 A paragraph environment is simply a
4685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4692 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4693 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4694 scheme, labels, and so on.
4695 Additionally, you can
4696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4703 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4704 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4705 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4706 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4708 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4710 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4714 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4715 \begin_inset Graphics
4716 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4722 at the left end of the toolbar.
4724 will change the environment of the
4728 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4729 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4730 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4743 create a new paragraph using the
4747 paragraph environment.
4749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4756 because if you are in one of these environments:
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Itemize
4789 \begin_layout Itemize
4795 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4803 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4807 , rather than resetting it to
4812 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4813 \begin_inset space ~
4817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4819 reference "sec:Nesting"
4826 \begin_layout Subsection
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 The default paragraph environment is
4836 It creates a plain paragraph.
4838 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4839 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4840 this manual) are in the
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 You can nest a paragraph using the
4852 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4860 \begin_layout Subsection
4862 \begin_inset Index idx
4865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4874 \begin_layout Standard
4875 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4876 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4885 for thanks or contact information.
4886 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4887 places all of this on a separate page
4888 along with today's date.
4889 For other types of documents, the title
4890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4897 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4903 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4917 Here's how you use them:
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 Put the title of your document in the
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 Put the author name in the
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4938 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4944 Note that using this environment is optional.
4945 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4946 will automatically insert today's date.
4947 If you don't want a date, use the option
4949 Suppress default date on front page
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4956 \begin_inset space ~
4964 \begin_layout Standard
4965 You can use footnotes to insert
4966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4973 or contact information.
4976 \begin_layout Subsection
4978 \begin_inset Index idx
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4990 name "subsec:Headings"
4997 \begin_layout Standard
4998 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5000 takes care of the numbering for you.
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 \begin_inset Index idx
5008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5009 Section headings ! Numbered
5017 \begin_layout Standard
5018 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5022 \begin_layout Enumerate
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Enumerate
5052 \begin_layout Enumerate
5058 \begin_layout Enumerate
5064 \begin_layout Standard
5066 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5067 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5068 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5071 \begin_layout Standard
5072 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5073 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5074 You group the book into chapters.
5076 does a similar grouping:
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 is divided into either
5095 \begin_layout Itemize
5107 \begin_layout Itemize
5119 \begin_layout Itemize
5131 \begin_layout Itemize
5143 \begin_layout Itemize
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5164 Not all document types use the
5168 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5173 is the top-level heading.
5181 \begin_layout Standard
5186 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5187 labels it with its number,
5188 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5190 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5204 \begin_inset Index idx
5207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5208 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5216 \begin_layout Standard
5217 The unnumbered section headings have a
5218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5225 at the end of their name.
5226 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5227 the table of contents, see section
5228 \begin_inset space ~
5232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5242 Changing the Numbering
5243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5245 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5252 \begin_layout Standard
5253 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5254 in the Table of Contents.
5255 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5257 Just as certain classes start with
5271 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5281 This is something you can change.
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5291 \begin_inset Index idx
5294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 \begin_inset space ~
5307 \begin_inset space ~
5312 you will see two counters.
5317 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5318 numbers a section heading.
5319 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5324 Short Titles of Headings
5325 \begin_inset Index idx
5328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 Section headings ! Short titles
5335 \begin_inset Argument 1
5338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5347 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5354 \begin_layout Standard
5355 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5356 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5357 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5358 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5361 \begin_layout Standard
5363 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5364 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5365 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5366 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5371 \begin_inset space ~
5377 This will insert a box labeled
5378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5382 \begin_inset space ~
5386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5389 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5390 This also works for captions inside floats.
5391 There can only be one short title per title.
5394 \begin_layout Standard
5395 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5403 The following information applies to all section headings:
5406 \begin_layout Itemize
5407 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5410 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5414 \begin_layout Itemize
5415 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5418 \begin_layout Itemize
5419 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5422 \begin_layout Subsection
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5428 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5442 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5443 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5444 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5445 the text they contain.
5446 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5454 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5457 \begin_layout Standard
5458 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5467 when you start a new paragraph.
5468 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5472 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5473 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5474 have to change back to the
5478 environment yourself.
5481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5504 time for the differences.
5513 are identical except for one difference:
5517 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5526 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 Here's an example of the
5543 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5545 See – no indentation!
5549 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5550 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5551 the other paragraph.
5554 \begin_layout Standard
5555 Here's another example, this time in the
5562 \begin_layout Quotation
5568 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5569 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5570 the first line, then
5574 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5578 you were quoting other text.
5581 \begin_layout Quotation
5582 Here's a new paragraph.
5583 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5584 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5587 \begin_layout Standard
5588 As the examples show,
5592 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5593 They should put quotes in the
5598 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5602 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5617 \begin_inset Index idx
5620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5636 \begin_layout Standard
5641 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5647 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 Which I did not rehearse!
5654 It could be much worse.
5655 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5657 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5658 indented a bit more than the first.
5659 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5665 \begin_inset Newline newline
5668 And make things look fine
5669 \begin_inset Newline newline
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Standard
5686 does not indent both margins.
5687 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5688 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5691 arg "newline-insert newline"
5697 \begin_layout Subsection
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5718 \begin_layout Standard
5720 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5730 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5731 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5740 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5741 lets you provide your own label.
5742 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5743 describing some general features of all four of them.
5746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5750 \begin_layout Standard
5751 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5753 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5754 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5763 reset the environment to
5767 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5768 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5769 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5777 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5786 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5787 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5789 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5790 you read all of section
5791 \begin_inset space ~
5795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5797 reference "sec:Nesting"
5804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5806 \begin_inset Index idx
5809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5825 \begin_layout Standard
5826 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5830 paragraph environment.
5831 It has the following properties:
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5835 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5845 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 The items can have any length.
5852 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5853 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5860 \begin_layout Itemize
5865 environment inside another
5869 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5873 \begin_layout Itemize
5874 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5877 \begin_layout Itemize
5879 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5882 \begin_layout Itemize
5884 \begin_inset space ~
5888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5890 reference "sec:Nesting"
5894 for a full explanation of nesting.
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5899 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5908 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5911 \begin_layout Standard
5912 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5913 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5916 \begin_layout Itemize
5917 The label for the first level
5921 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5925 \begin_layout Itemize
5926 The label for the second level is a dash.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5935 \begin_layout Itemize
5936 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5941 Back out to the third level.
5945 \begin_layout Itemize
5946 Back to the second level.
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5951 Back to the outermost level.
5954 \begin_layout Standard
5955 These are the default labels for an
5960 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5965 dialog in the submenu
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5979 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5983 \begin_layout Standard
5984 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5985 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5987 \begin_inset space ~
5991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5993 reference "sec:Nesting"
6000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6002 \begin_inset Index idx
6005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6014 name "sec:Enumerate"
6021 \begin_layout Standard
6026 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6027 It has these properties:
6030 \begin_layout Enumerate
6031 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 environment resets the counter to one.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6068 Items can have any length.
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6075 \begin_layout Enumerate
6076 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6079 \begin_layout Enumerate
6080 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6093 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6095 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6096 labels the four different levels in an
6103 \begin_layout Enumerate
6104 The first level of an
6108 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6122 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6132 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 Back to the third level
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6138 Back to the second level.
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6143 Back to the outermost level.
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6147 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6151 environment, see section
6152 \begin_inset space ~
6156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6158 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6163 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 There is more to nesting
6172 environments than we've stated here.
6173 You should read section
6174 \begin_inset space ~
6178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6180 reference "sec:Nesting"
6184 to learn more about nesting.
6187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6189 \begin_inset Index idx
6192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6206 list has no fixed label.
6207 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6216 of the first line as the label.
6220 \begin_layout Description
6221 Example: This is an example of the
6228 \begin_layout Standard
6230 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6234 \begin_layout Standard
6236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6243 it is meant that the first usage of the
6247 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6249 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6257 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6277 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6281 for more information.) Here is an example:
6284 \begin_layout Description
6286 \begin_inset space ~
6289 Example: This one shows how to use a
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_layout Description
6305 Usage: You should use the
6309 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6310 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6312 It's not a good idea to use a
6316 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6317 You're better off using
6329 paragraphs into them.
6332 \begin_layout Description
6333 Nesting: You can nest
6337 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6341 \begin_layout Standard
6342 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6343 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6344 them from the first line.
6347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6349 \begin_inset Index idx
6352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6361 \begin_layout Standard
6366 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6367 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6380 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6382 Here are its properties:
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6388 \begin_inset space ~
6391 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6400 of each line as the item label.
6405 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6406 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6407 space as described above.
6410 \begin_layout Labeling
6411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6412 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6413 uses different margins for the item label and the
6414 body of the item text.
6415 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6416 label width plus a little extra space.
6420 \begin_layout Labeling
6421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6426 width \SpecialChar LyX
6427 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6428 If the label width is larger, the label
6429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6436 into the first line.
6437 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6438 margin of the rest of the item text.
6441 \begin_layout Labeling
6442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6444 \begin_inset space ~
6447 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6452 environment has the same left margin.
6453 \begin_inset Newline newline
6456 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6461 \begin_inset space ~
6466 dialog (toolbar button
6469 arg "layout-paragraph"
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6481 determines the default label width.
6482 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6491 multiple times instead.
6492 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6502 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6505 \begin_inset space ~
6510 every time you alter a label in a
6515 \begin_inset Newline newline
6518 The predefined default width is the length of
6519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 \begin_inset space ~
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6538 list the same way as the
6542 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6548 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6552 \begin_layout Standard
6557 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6558 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "sec:Nesting"
6570 to learn about nesting.
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 There is yet another feature of the
6578 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6579 left-justifies the item labels by
6581 You can use additional
6585 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6586 justifies the item label.
6591 are documented in section
6592 \begin_inset space ~
6596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6598 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6603 Here are some examples:
6606 \begin_layout Labeling
6607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6608 Left The default for
6615 \begin_layout Labeling
6616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6627 \begin_layout Labeling
6628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6629 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6633 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6640 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6643 \begin_layout Subsection
6645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6647 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6652 \begin_inset Index idx
6655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6665 The features described in this section require that the module
6667 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6669 is loaded in the document settings.
6670 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6676 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 -packages ! enumitem
6689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6690 Custom Enumerate Lists
6691 \begin_inset Index idx
6694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6703 \begin_layout Standard
6705 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6711 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6712 There you add the command
6715 \begin_layout Standard
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6736 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6737 Code, look at section
6738 \begin_inset space ~
6742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6744 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6757 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6764 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6765 For capital Roman numerals replace
6777 in the command above.
6778 For Arabic numerals use
6786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6793 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6810 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6818 You can only number 26
6819 \begin_inset space ~
6822 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6831 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6832 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6839 \begin_layout Enumerate
6840 \begin_inset Argument 1
6843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6869 \begin_layout Enumerate
6870 \begin_inset Argument 1
6873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_layout Enumerate
6902 \begin_inset Argument 1
6905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6929 \begin_layout Enumerate
6930 \begin_inset Argument 1
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6960 For this list these commands were used:
6963 \begin_layout Standard
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6982 \begin_inset Newline newline
6990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7007 makes the label emphasized and
7016 \begin_layout Standard
7017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7026 lists until you change the definition.
7034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7036 \begin_inset Index idx
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7052 \begin_layout Enumerate
7053 \begin_inset Argument 1
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7075 \begin_inset Note Note
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 goes back to default numbering
7087 \begin_layout Enumerate
7091 \begin_layout Standard
7095 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7105 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7106 to indicate that it is a resumed
7107 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7108 , but in the output.
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7120 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7129 \begin_layout Standard
7130 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7132 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7133 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7134 of a normal enumeration.
7135 There, insert the command
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7149 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7157 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 \begin_layout Standard
7162 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7165 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 \begin_inset Argument 1
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7185 This enumeration starts at 4
7188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7190 \begin_inset Index idx
7193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7202 \begin_layout Standard
7203 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7205 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7208 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 with standard spacing
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7217 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7219 Add there the command
7223 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7226 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_inset Argument 1
7230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7249 \begin_layout Itemize
7253 \begin_layout Itemize
7257 \begin_layout Standard
7258 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7265 \begin_inset Index idx
7268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7270 -packages ! enumitem
7276 For more information see its documentation,
7277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7288 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7290 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7291 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7295 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7299 \begin_inset Argument 1
7302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7310 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7323 \begin_layout Enumerate
7324 with negative indentation
7327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7328 Further Customization
7329 \begin_inset Index idx
7332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7333 Lists ! Customization
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 You can also change the style of description lists.
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7353 changes the description label font, the command
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7363 sets the list style.
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 An example where the command
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7375 itshape, style=nextline
7378 \begin_layout Standard
7382 \begin_layout Description
7384 \begin_inset space ~
7388 \begin_inset Argument 1
7391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7397 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7399 itshape, style=nextline
7409 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7410 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7414 \begin_layout Description
7416 \begin_inset space ~
7419 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7420 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7421 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7424 \begin_layout Standard
7425 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7431 \begin_inset Index idx
7434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7436 -packages ! enumitem
7442 For more information see its documentation
7443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7453 \begin_layout Subsection
7455 \begin_inset Index idx
7458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7469 \begin_inset space ~
7472 Address: An Overview
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7476 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7477 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7485 \begin_inset space ~
7491 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7492 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7493 gags on the document.
7494 In contrast, you can use the
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7506 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7507 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 Of course, you're not limited to using
7519 \begin_inset space ~
7528 \begin_inset space ~
7533 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7534 some European academic papers.
7537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7541 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7553 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7554 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7558 \begin_inset space ~
7563 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7564 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7565 Here's an example of each:
7568 \begin_layout Right Address
7570 \begin_inset Newline newline
7574 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 When is it? What is today?
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7588 \begin_inset space ~
7594 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7596 the largest block of text on a single line.
7597 Here's an example of the
7604 \begin_layout Address
7606 \begin_inset Newline newline
7609 Where do I send this
7610 \begin_inset Newline newline
7613 Your post office and country
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7617 As you can see, both
7624 \begin_inset space ~
7629 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7634 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7635 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7641 This makes sense, since
7649 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7650 Thus, you have to use
7657 arg "newline-insert newline"
7662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7665 \begin_inset space ~
7669 \begin_inset space ~
7674 ) to start a new line in an
7681 \begin_inset space ~
7689 \begin_layout Subsection
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7694 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7695 or list of references.
7697 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7702 \begin_inset Index idx
7705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7714 \begin_layout Standard
7719 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7720 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7721 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7722 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7736 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7737 The book document classes ignores the
7741 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7745 in a letter document class.
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7753 environment does several things for you.
7754 First, it puts the centered label
7755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7763 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7765 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7766 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7767 the subsequent text.
7768 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7770 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7774 \begin_layout Standard
7775 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7779 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7780 The new paragraph will still be in the
7785 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7786 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7789 \begin_layout Standard
7790 \begin_inset Float figure
7795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7797 \begin_inset Graphics
7798 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7811 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7832 \begin_layout Standard
7833 We would love to demonstrate the
7837 environment, but since this document is in the
7838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7845 class, we can't do this.
7846 We inserted it therefore as figure
7847 \begin_inset space ~
7851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7853 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7858 If you have never heard of an
7859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7866 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7883 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7890 \begin_layout Standard
7895 environment is used to list references.
7896 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7897 only use it at the end of the document.
7909 \begin_layout Standard
7910 When you first open a
7914 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7915 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7931 depending on the document class.
7932 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7933 Each paragraph of the
7937 environment is a bibliography entry.
7942 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7943 Each new paragraph is still in the
7950 \begin_layout Standard
7951 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7952 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7954 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7956 handling, have a look at section
7957 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7963 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7970 \begin_layout Subsection
7971 Special Environments
7974 \begin_layout Standard
7976 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7977 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7985 \begin_inset Index idx
7988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7998 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8005 \begin_layout Standard
8011 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8013 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8018 key as a fixed whitespace.
8022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8040 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8058 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8061 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8081 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8082 So, when you finish using the
8087 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8088 Also, you can nest the
8093 environment inside of others.
8096 \begin_layout Standard
8097 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8107 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8112 \begin_inset space \space{}
8122 arg "newline-insert newline"
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 arg "newline-insert newline"
8142 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8150 You must put at least one
8154 in any line you want blank.
8155 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8159 \begin_layout Itemize
8160 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8164 since that will insert
8169 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8172 arg "self-insert \""
8178 \begin_layout Standard
8182 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 printf("Hello World!
8204 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8208 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8212 \begin_layout Standard
8213 This is just the standard
8214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8231 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8233 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8234 as if you used a typewriter.
8235 \begin_inset Index idx
8238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8239 Paragraph environments|)
8244 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8247 Program Code Listings
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8264 \begin_inset Index idx
8267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8276 \begin_layout Standard
8281 environment is similar to the
8286 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8287 computer console text.
8292 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8306 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8307 you can have empty lines.
8320 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 have a certain language and a text style
8324 \begin_layout Itemize
8325 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8326 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8327 and \SpecialChar TeX
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Because of these properties
8336 works like a typewriter.
8340 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8369 environment is identical to
8373 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8374 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8381 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8385 \begin_layout Section
8386 Nesting Environments
8387 \begin_inset Index idx
8390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8391 Nesting ! Environments
8397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8406 \begin_layout Subsection
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8412 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8414 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8416 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8418 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8430 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8439 \begin_layout Enumerate
8443 \begin_layout Enumerate
8448 \begin_layout Enumerate
8452 \begin_layout Standard
8453 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8454 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8458 \begin_inset space ~
8462 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset space ~
8474 \begin_inset space ~
8479 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8481 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8484 arg "depth-increment"
8490 arg "depth-decrement"
8504 arg "depth-increment"
8510 arg "depth-decrement"
8514 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8515 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8519 \begin_layout Standard
8520 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8521 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8522 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8523 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8524 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8527 \begin_layout Standard
8528 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8530 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8532 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8535 \begin_layout Subsection
8536 What You Can and Can't Nest
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8540 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8541 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8544 \begin_layout Standard
8545 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8546 than a simple yes or no.
8547 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8550 \begin_layout Itemize
8551 Completely unnestable
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8564 \begin_layout Standard
8565 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8566 environments have them:
8569 \begin_layout Description
8570 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8571 Can't nest into them.
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_layout Itemize
8587 \begin_layout Itemize
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_layout Description
8608 \begin_inset space ~
8611 Nestable You can nest them.
8612 You can nest other things into them.
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8652 \begin_layout Itemize
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Description
8679 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8680 You can't nest anything into them.
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_layout Itemize
8756 \begin_layout Itemize
8762 \begin_layout Itemize
8766 \begin_inset space ~
8772 \begin_layout Itemize
8779 \begin_layout Standard
8780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8798 \begin_inset space ~
8801 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8802 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8803 nested section headings violate this.
8811 \begin_layout Subsection
8812 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8813 \begin_inset Index idx
8816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8825 \begin_layout Standard
8826 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8827 affected by nesting anyhow.
8831 \begin_layout Itemize
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8845 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8853 Figures and tables in
8857 are not affected by this.
8862 Have a look at section
8863 \begin_inset space ~
8867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8869 reference "sec:Floats"
8873 for more information about
8880 \begin_layout Standard
8882 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8883 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8887 \begin_layout Standard
8888 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8896 of its own, it behaves just like a
8897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8904 paragraph environment.
8905 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 Here's an example with a table:
8913 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8919 This is (a) and it's nested.
8923 \begin_layout Standard
8924 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8930 \begin_layout Standard
8932 \begin_inset Tabular
8933 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8934 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9021 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9030 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9034 \begin_layout Enumerate
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9042 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 \begin_layout Enumerate
9048 This is (a) and it's nested.
9052 \begin_layout Standard
9053 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9059 \begin_layout Standard
9061 \begin_inset Tabular
9062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9156 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9166 \begin_layout Enumerate
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9171 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9179 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9182 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 This is (a) and it's nested.
9191 \begin_layout Standard
9192 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9198 \begin_layout Standard
9200 \begin_inset Tabular
9201 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9202 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9289 \begin_layout Standard
9290 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9296 \begin_layout Enumerate
9298 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9309 \begin_layout Standard
9310 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9316 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9317 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9321 \begin_layout Subsection
9322 Usage and General Features
9325 \begin_layout Standard
9326 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9327 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9336 is the innermost possible depth.
9337 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9340 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 level #1 – outermost
9345 \begin_layout Enumerate
9350 \begin_layout Enumerate
9355 \begin_layout Enumerate
9360 \begin_layout Itemize
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9375 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9376 both of them in the example.
9377 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9387 For example, if we tried to nest another
9392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9399 , we would get errors.
9402 \begin_layout Subsection
9404 \begin_inset Index idx
9407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9416 \begin_layout Standard
9417 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9418 We have several examples of nested environments.
9419 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9424 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9427 \begin_layout Labeling
9428 \labelwidthstring MMM
9429 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9438 \begin_layout Labeling
9439 \labelwidthstring MMM
9440 #2-a This is level #2.
9441 We created it by using
9444 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9450 arg "depth-increment"
9457 \begin_layout Labeling
9458 \labelwidthstring MMM
9459 #3-a This is level #3.
9460 This time, we just enter
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9471 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9475 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9481 arg "depth-increment"
9488 \begin_layout Standard
9493 environment, nested inside of
9494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9502 So, it's at level #4.
9503 We did this by entering
9506 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9512 arg "depth-increment"
9515 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9520 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9536 \begin_layout Standard
9541 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9544 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9550 \begin_layout Labeling
9551 \labelwidthstring MMM
9552 #4-a This is level #4.
9556 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9559 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9564 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9568 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9573 keep nesting things inside
9574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9585 \begin_layout Labeling
9586 \labelwidthstring MMM
9587 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9592 \begin_layout Labeling
9593 \labelwidthstring MMM
9594 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9595 and this is level #6.
9596 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9600 \begin_layout Labeling
9601 \labelwidthstring MMM
9602 #5-b Back to level #5.
9606 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9612 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 \begin_layout Labeling
9620 \labelwidthstring MMM
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-decrement"
9633 , we're back at level #4.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #3-b Back to level #3.
9640 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9644 \begin_layout Labeling
9645 \labelwidthstring MMM
9646 #2-b Back to level #2.
9651 \begin_layout Labeling
9652 \labelwidthstring MMM
9653 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9654 After this sentence, we will enter
9658 and change the paragraph environment back to
9665 \begin_layout Standard
9666 We could have also used the
9682 environment in place of the
9687 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9691 Example 2: Inheritance
9694 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9695 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9698 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9707 arg "depth-increment"
9711 \begin_inset Newline newline
9714 which, we will change to the
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9727 environment, at level #2.
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9731 Notice how the nested
9735 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9739 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9743 \begin_layout Standard
9744 We ended this example by entering
9749 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9753 and reset the nesting depth by using
9756 arg "depth-decrement"
9762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9763 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9772 \begin_inset Argument 1
9775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9776 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9784 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 This is level #1, in an
9789 paragraph environment.
9790 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9794 \begin_layout Enumerate
9799 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9805 arg "depth-increment"
9809 Now, what happens if we nest an
9813 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9814 label be? An asterisk?
9818 \begin_layout Itemize
9828 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9829 So, its label is a bullet.
9830 (We got here by using
9833 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9839 arg "depth-increment"
9842 , then changing the environment to
9850 \begin_layout Itemize
9851 Here's level #4, produced using
9854 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9860 arg "depth-increment"
9864 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9869 \begin_layout Enumerate
9872 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9877 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9881 , because we are in the
9889 environment (that is, it is an
9904 \begin_layout Enumerate
9909 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9910 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9914 \begin_layout Enumerate
9915 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9921 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9928 arg "depth-decrement"
9931 to decrease the depth after the next
9934 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9943 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9951 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9955 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9965 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9970 reset the counter for the label.
9974 \begin_layout Enumerate
9978 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9984 arg "depth-decrement"
9987 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9988 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9989 into the twofold-nested
9997 \begin_layout Enumerate
9998 The same thing happens if we do another
10001 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10007 arg "depth-decrement"
10010 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10013 \begin_layout Standard
10014 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10019 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10030 The number of other
10034 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10041 The same rule applies for the
10045 environment, as well.
10048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10049 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10052 \begin_layout Enumerate
10053 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10054 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10055 the same detail with how we did it.
10064 \begin_layout Standard
10072 arg "depth-increment"
10079 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10080 the example in parentheses someplace.
10081 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10082 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10083 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10087 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10096 \begin_layout Verse
10097 Now we will add verse.
10098 \begin_inset Newline newline
10101 It will get much worse.
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10112 arg "depth-increment"
10122 \begin_layout Verse
10123 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10124 \begin_inset Newline newline
10127 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10128 \begin_inset Newline newline
10134 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10142 \begin_layout Verse
10143 Here comes a table:
10147 \begin_layout Standard
10148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset Tabular
10157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10158 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10245 \begin_layout Verse
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10259 arg "depth-increment"
10265 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10271 \begin_inset Newline newline
10279 arg "depth-decrement"
10286 \begin_layout Enumerate
10291 : level #1) This is another item.
10292 Note that selecting a
10296 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10297 3 times to put the table inside the
10305 \begin_layout Quotation
10306 We're now ending the
10310 list and changing to
10315 We're still at level #1.
10316 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10317 The next set of paragraphs is a
10318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10325 We will nest both the
10332 \begin_inset space ~
10337 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10341 for the letter body.
10345 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10348 to preserve the depth.
10349 Remember that you need to use
10352 arg "newline-insert newline"
10355 to create multiple lines inside the
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10372 \begin_layout Right Address
10374 \begin_inset Newline newline
10377 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10378 \begin_inset Newline newline
10384 \begin_layout Address
10386 \begin_inset space ~
10392 \begin_layout Quotation
10393 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10397 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10398 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10399 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10400 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10401 as soon as possible.
10402 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10405 \begin_layout Quotation
10406 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10407 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10408 with your order, along with payment.
10411 \begin_layout Quotation
10412 We thank you again for your patience.
10415 \begin_layout Address
10417 \begin_inset Newline newline
10424 \begin_layout Quotation
10425 That ends that example!
10428 \begin_layout Standard
10429 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10430 gives you a lot of power with just
10432 We could have easily nested an
10453 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10456 \begin_layout Subsection
10458 \begin_inset Index idx
10461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10462 Nesting ! Separation
10468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10470 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10477 \begin_layout Standard
10478 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10480 For example you need two different enumerations:
10483 \begin_layout Enumerate
10488 \begin_layout Enumerate
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Standard
10498 \begin_inset Separator plain
10504 \begin_layout Itemize
10510 \begin_layout Standard
10511 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10517 \begin_layout Enumerate
10521 \begin_layout Enumerate
10525 \begin_layout Enumerate
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10531 list item and use the menu
10533 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10534 Start New Environment
10537 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10538 ) and behind it the new list.
10541 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10542 Start New Parent Environment
10544 only appears if the item is nested.
10545 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10550 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10551 (red arrow in LyX).
10552 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10553 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10556 \begin_layout Standard
10557 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10560 arg "paragraph-break"
10567 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10570 \begin_layout Section
10571 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10572 \begin_inset Index idx
10575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10584 \begin_layout Standard
10585 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10586 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10588 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10589 be broken at the end of a line.
10590 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10594 \begin_layout Subsection
10596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10598 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10603 \begin_inset Index idx
10606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10617 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10618 ) not to break the line at
10620 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10623 \begin_layout Quote
10624 Further documentation is given in section
10625 \begin_inset Newline newline
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10639 \begin_layout Standard
10640 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10655 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10664 A protected space is set with
10666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10677 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10683 \begin_layout Subsection
10685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10687 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10692 \begin_inset Index idx
10695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10696 Spacing ! Horizontal
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10708 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10712 The length units are listed in Appendix
10713 \begin_inset space ~
10717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10719 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10730 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10735 \begin_inset Index idx
10738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10739 Spaces ! Inter-word
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10749 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10750 at the ends of sentences.
10751 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10752 automatically takes care about this.
10753 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10754 followed by a period; see section
10755 \begin_inset space ~
10759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10761 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10766 To insert a normal space, select
10768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 \begin_inset space ~
10779 arg "space-insert normal"
10785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10789 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10794 \begin_inset Index idx
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_layout Standard
10808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10815 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10824 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10825 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10826 inside abbreviations:
10829 \begin_layout Quote
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 or between values and units.
10840 Compare for example this:
10841 \begin_inset Newline newline
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 \begin_inset Newline newline
10852 10 kg (normal space
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10869 arg "space-insert thin"
10875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10879 \begin_layout Standard
10880 You can also insert the following space types:
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative thin space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative medium space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10940 space A line with a
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10952 negative thick space between the arrows.
10955 \begin_layout Description
10957 \begin_inset space ~
10961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10965 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10969 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10984 em) space between the arrows.
10987 \begin_layout Description
10989 \begin_inset space ~
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11001 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 em) space between the arrows.
11019 \begin_layout Description
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11029 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11033 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11037 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11041 \begin_inset space ~
11045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11048 em) space between the arrows.
11051 \begin_layout Description
11053 \begin_inset space ~
11057 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11061 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11066 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11073 cm space between the arrows.
11076 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset space ~
11082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11084 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11088 lists the different space sizes.
11091 \begin_layout Standard
11092 \begin_inset Float table
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11103 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11107 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11117 \begin_inset Tabular
11118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11119 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11396 \begin_inset Index idx
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11408 \begin_layout Standard
11409 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11410 feature for adding extra space
11411 in a uniform fashion.
11412 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11413 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11414 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11415 equally between themselves.
11418 \begin_layout Standard
11419 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11422 \begin_layout Quote
11424 This is on the left side
11425 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 This is on the right
11431 \begin_layout Quote
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11444 \begin_layout Quote
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11461 \begin_layout Standard
11462 That was an example in the
11468 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11476 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11479 is one in a standard paragraph.
11480 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11484 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11488 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11496 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11549 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11553 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11565 \begin_inset space ~
11571 \begin_layout Standard
11572 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11584 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11586 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11587 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11591 option in the space dialog.
11599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11603 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11608 \begin_inset Index idx
11611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11621 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11622 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11625 \begin_layout Standard
11626 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11629 What is correct English?:
11630 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset space ~
11641 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11642 \begin_inset Newline newline
11646 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11657 \begin_inset Newline newline
11661 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11678 \begin_layout Standard
11680 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11704 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11721 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11730 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11731 That is why it is named
11732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11740 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11741 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11745 \begin_layout Subsection
11747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11749 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11754 \begin_inset Index idx
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11766 \begin_layout Standard
11767 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 \begin_inset space ~
11778 There you find the following sizes:
11781 \begin_layout Standard
11794 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11795 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11800 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 \begin_inset space ~
11811 \begin_inset Index idx
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 Document ! Settings
11820 for the paragraph separation.
11821 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11832 \begin_layout Standard
11838 \begin_inset Index idx
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11847 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11848 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11853 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11854 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11863 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 s are described in section
11873 \begin_inset space ~
11877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11879 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11888 If there are several
11892 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11893 You can therefore use
11897 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11900 \begin_layout Standard
11905 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11906 \begin_inset space ~
11910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11912 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11919 \begin_layout Standard
11920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11930 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11931 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11943 \begin_layout Subsection
11944 Paragraph Alignment
11945 \begin_inset Index idx
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 Paragraph ! Alignment
11957 \begin_layout Standard
11958 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11963 dialog (toolbar button
11966 arg "layout-paragraph"
11970 There are five possibilities:
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12029 \begin_layout Itemize
12037 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12043 \begin_layout Standard
12044 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12045 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12046 the left and right margins.
12047 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12052 This paragraph is right aligned,
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12057 this one is centered,
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12062 this one is left aligned.
12065 \begin_layout Subsection
12067 \begin_inset Index idx
12070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12071 Page breaks ! Forced
12077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12079 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12088 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12089 force a page break where you want one.
12090 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 is good at page breaking.
12092 Only if you use a lot of
12096 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12100 \begin_layout Standard
12101 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12102 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12106 have to change the page breaking.
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12112 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 \begin_inset space ~
12123 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 \begin_inset space ~
12133 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12135 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12136 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12140 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12141 at the top of a page.
12142 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12144 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12145 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12146 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12154 to learn more about
12161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12165 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12170 \begin_inset Index idx
12173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 Page breaks ! Clear
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12184 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12185 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12186 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12187 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 \begin_inset space ~
12202 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 \begin_inset space ~
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12216 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12217 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12220 \begin_layout Subsection
12222 \begin_inset Index idx
12225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12234 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12241 \begin_layout Standard
12242 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12244 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 \begin_inset space ~
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12261 arg "newline-insert newline"
12265 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 \begin_inset space ~
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12282 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12285 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12287 This is useful to avoid
12288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12295 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12298 \begin_layout Standard
12299 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 very good at line breaking.
12303 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12304 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12305 \begin_inset space ~
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Quote"
12316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12318 reference "sec:Verse"
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12325 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12332 \begin_layout Subsection
12334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12336 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12341 \begin_inset Index idx
12344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12353 \begin_layout Standard
12355 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 \begin_inset space ~
12378 you can insert horizontal lines.
12379 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12380 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12381 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12397 \begin_layout Section
12398 Characters and Symbols
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12403 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12404 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12412 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12416 for information on how this is done.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12425 dialog via the menu
12427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12428 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12434 \begin_layout Standard
12435 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12444 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12446 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12454 \begin_layout Section
12455 Fonts and Text Styles
12456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12458 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12465 \begin_layout Subsection
12467 \begin_inset Index idx
12470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12479 \begin_layout Standard
12480 There are two types of fonts:
12483 \begin_layout Description
12485 \begin_inset space ~
12489 \begin_inset Index idx
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12498 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12503 characters) in the font.
12504 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12505 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12506 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12507 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12508 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12509 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12510 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12511 \begin_inset Newline newline
12514 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12515 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12516 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12517 sizes than at small ones.
12518 \begin_inset Newline newline
12532 \begin_inset space ~
12540 \begin_layout Description
12542 \begin_inset space ~
12546 \begin_inset Index idx
12549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12555 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12556 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12557 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12558 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12559 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12560 image manipulation program.
12561 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12562 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12566 pixels high up to 34
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12570 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12571 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12572 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12574 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12575 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12576 \begin_inset Newline newline
12579 Bitmap fonts are named
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12587 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12592 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12593 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12594 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12595 use scalable fonts.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12604 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12605 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12606 font to emphasize text, you use an
12607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12615 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12617 In \SpecialChar LyX
12618 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12622 \begin_layout Subsection
12625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12627 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12635 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12636 used its own fonts.
12637 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12638 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12642 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12643 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12644 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12645 to a word processor.
12646 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12647 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12648 files are very portable across
12649 different machines.
12650 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 has increased a lot
12652 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12655 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12663 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12668 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12669 code in the document
12670 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12675 engines that are also able directly
12676 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12678 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12680 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12682 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12683 that is installed on your system.
12684 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12687 \begin_layout Standard
12688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12696 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12697 es; so you might have to experiment.
12705 \begin_layout Subsection
12706 Document Font and Font size
12707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12709 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12714 \begin_inset Index idx
12717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12737 You can set the document fonts in the
12739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12743 \begin_inset Index idx
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 Document ! Settings
12757 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12758 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12770 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12775 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12778 \begin_layout Standard
12783 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12784 This requires that you use
12796 as the output format, i.
12797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12801 \begin_inset space \space{}
12804 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12805 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12806 installed (see section
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12813 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12818 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12820 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12821 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12823 \begin_inset space ~
12826 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12827 cannot determine the family.
12828 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12829 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12832 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12835 \begin_layout Standard
12836 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12837 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12842 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12848 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12849 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset space ~
12863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12876 European Computer Modern
12879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12889 \begin_layout Standard
12898 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12899 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12904 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12912 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12918 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12919 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12922 \begin_layout Itemize
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12931 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12944 \begin_inset space ~
12949 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12950 community in order to replace
12954 as the default font.
12955 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12956 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12959 \begin_inset space ~
12972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12973 One difference is improved kerning.
12981 \begin_layout Itemize
12985 \begin_inset space ~
12989 \begin_inset space ~
12994 fonts in (the rare) case that
12997 \begin_inset space ~
13002 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13017 Virtual means that it
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13029 -glyphs from other fonts.
13030 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13052 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13058 \begin_inset Index idx
13061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13063 -packages ! aeguill
13068 with the document preamble line
13069 \begin_inset Newline newline
13076 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13077 \begin_inset Newline newline
13082 will fix the guillemet problem.
13087 and that accented characters are not
13091 glyph, but built of
13095 characters, the accent and the letter.
13096 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13102 If you search for example for the French word
13103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13110 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13119 and not for the glyph
13120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13134 \begin_layout Itemize
13135 If you do not like the look of
13143 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13164 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13168 serif and typewriter fonts,
13172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13173 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13189 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13194 \begin_inset space \space{}
13202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13206 \begin_inset space \space{}
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13230 but you can also select your own.
13231 \begin_inset Newline newline
13234 The differences between roman,
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13246 fonts are explained in section
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13253 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13258 \begin_inset Newline newline
13264 \begin_inset space ~
13269 was originally designed for newspapers.
13270 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13271 into the small newspaper columns.
13275 \begin_inset space ~
13280 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13283 \begin_layout Standard
13284 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13297 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13302 depends on the class you are using.
13303 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13307 Note that the font size is the
13312 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13313 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13314 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13315 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13324 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13331 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13338 \begin_layout Standard
13342 \begin_inset space ~
13347 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13349 \begin_inset space ~
13352 serif or typewriter.
13357 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13367 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13370 \begin_layout Standard
13375 LaTeX font encoding
13377 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13378 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13384 \begin_inset Index idx
13387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13389 -packages ! fontenc
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13401 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13406 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13407 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13414 \begin_layout Standard
13415 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13417 Use Old Style Figures
13421 Use True Small Caps
13424 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13427 Use Old Style Figures
13429 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13431 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13439 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13443 Use True Small Caps
13445 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13446 of scaled capitals.
13447 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13448 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13451 \begin_layout Standard
13456 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13457 a font to display the script characters.
13461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13462 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13468 \begin_inset Index idx
13471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13478 So this has no effect for the document language
13492 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13504 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13509 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13510 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13512 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13514 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13517 dialog, see section
13518 \begin_inset space ~
13522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13524 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13536 \begin_layout Subsection
13540 \begin_layout Standard
13541 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13542 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13544 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13545 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13546 choose a math font in the dialog
13548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13552 \begin_inset Index idx
13555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13556 Document ! Settings
13562 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13563 automatically selects a math font.
13564 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13565 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13574 \begin_inset space ~
13580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13585 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13586 document font is available.
13589 \begin_layout Standard
13590 Note that the math font will not be used for
13594 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13600 or by the insertion of the command
13607 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13608 \begin_inset space ~
13612 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13613 while the math characters do not.
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13618 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13621 \begin_inset space ~
13629 \begin_inset space ~
13634 in the document font settings.
13637 \begin_layout Standard
13638 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13639 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13640 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13641 font (in most cases
13642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13657 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13658 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13666 \begin_inset space ~
13672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13678 \begin_layout Subsection
13679 Using Different Character Styles
13680 \begin_inset Index idx
13683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13690 \begin_inset Index idx
13693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13702 \begin_layout Standard
13703 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13704 automatically changes the character style for certain
13705 paragraph environments.
13707 supports two character styles,
13716 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13720 \begin_layout Standard
13725 style, do one of the following:
13728 \begin_layout Itemize
13729 click on the toolbar button
13738 \begin_layout Itemize
13739 use the key binding
13748 \begin_layout Standard
13749 These commands are all toggles.
13754 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13757 \begin_layout Standard
13758 One typically uses the
13762 style for proper names.
13764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13771 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13779 \begin_layout Standard
13780 A more widely used character style is the
13785 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13792 \begin_layout Itemize
13793 clicking on the toolbar button
13802 \begin_layout Itemize
13803 using the keybindings
13812 \begin_layout Standard
13817 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13819 use a different font.
13822 \begin_layout Standard
13823 We've been using the
13827 style all over the place in this document.
13828 Here's one more example:
13831 \begin_layout Quotation
13834 Do not overuse character styles!
13837 \begin_layout Standard
13838 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13839 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13840 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13841 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13845 \begin_layout Standard
13846 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13854 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13856 \begin_inset space ~
13859 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13865 arg "dialog-show character"
13871 \begin_layout Subsection
13872 Fine-Tuning with the
13877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13879 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13884 \begin_inset Index idx
13887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13896 \begin_layout Standard
13897 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13899 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13900 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13901 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13902 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13903 from ordinary dialog.
13906 \begin_layout Standard
13907 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13908 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13909 \begin_inset Newline newline
13912 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13913 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13916 \begin_layout Standard
13917 To use custom character styles, open the
13919 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13921 \begin_inset space ~
13924 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13927 dialog or press the toolbar button
13930 arg "dialog-show character"
13934 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13935 font property that you can choose.
13936 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13939 \begin_inset space ~
13944 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13949 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13950 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13951 environments all at once.
13954 \begin_layout Standard
13955 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13958 \begin_inset space ~
13970 \begin_layout Labeling
13971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13985 The possible options are:
13989 \begin_layout Labeling
13990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13995 This is the Roman font family.
13996 Normally a serif font.
13997 It's also the default family.
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14012 \begin_inset space ~
14019 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14031 \begin_layout Labeling
14032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14039 This is the Typewriter font family.
14045 arg "font-typewriter"
14054 \begin_layout Labeling
14055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14060 This corresponds to the print weight.
14065 \begin_layout Labeling
14066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14071 This is the Medium font series.
14072 It's also the default series.
14075 \begin_layout Labeling
14076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14083 This is the Bold font series.
14096 \begin_layout Labeling
14097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14102 As the name implies.
14107 \begin_layout Labeling
14108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14113 This is the Upright font shape.
14114 It's also the default shape.
14117 \begin_layout Labeling
14118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 s the Italic font shape
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14146 This is the Slanted font shape
14148 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14149 , this is different from italic).
14152 \begin_layout Labeling
14153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14157 \begin_inset space ~
14164 This is the Small caps font shape
14171 \begin_layout Labeling
14172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14177 Alters the text color.
14178 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14182 \begin_inset space ~
14187 , which means that the document default color set in
14189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14190 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14196 \begin_inset space ~
14201 is used, you can choose between
14278 \begin_inset Index idx
14281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14290 \begin_layout Labeling
14291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14296 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14297 the language of the document.
14298 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14299 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14301 \begin_inset Newline newline
14304 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14306 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14307 When using the spell checking (see section
14308 \begin_inset space ~
14312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14314 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14318 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14321 \begin_layout Labeling
14322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14327 Alters the size of the font.
14328 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14329 proportional to the document font size.
14330 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14331 the details, but a general description of what
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14359 arg "font-size tiny"
14365 \begin_layout Labeling
14366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14387 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14393 \begin_layout Labeling
14394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14415 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14421 \begin_layout Labeling
14422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14443 arg "font-size small"
14449 \begin_layout Labeling
14450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14464 It's also the default size.
14468 arg "font-size normal"
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14496 arg "font-size large"
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14524 arg "font-size larger"
14530 \begin_layout Labeling
14531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14552 arg "font-size largest"
14558 \begin_layout Labeling
14559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14580 arg "font-size huge"
14586 \begin_layout Labeling
14587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14608 arg "font-size giant"
14614 \begin_layout Labeling
14615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14620 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14640 arg "font-size increase"
14646 \begin_layout Labeling
14647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14652 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14672 arg "font-size decrease"
14679 \begin_layout Standard
14684 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14685 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14687 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14688 — use those instead.
14689 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14692 \begin_layout Labeling
14693 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14698 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14703 \begin_layout Labeling
14704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14711 This is text with emphasize on
14714 This might seem like the same as
14718 , but it is actually a bit different.
14724 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14726 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14729 \begin_layout Labeling
14730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14737 This is text with Underbar on.
14743 arg "font-underline"
14749 \begin_inset Newline newline
14754 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14755 when you could not change fonts.
14756 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14757 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14758 because some people
14762 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14765 \begin_layout Labeling
14766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14770 \begin_inset space ~
14777 This is text with Double underbar on.
14783 arg "font-underunderline"
14787 \begin_inset Newline newline
14790 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14791 about double underbar.
14794 \begin_layout Labeling
14795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14806 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14812 arg "font-underwave"
14816 \begin_inset Newline newline
14819 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14820 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14823 \begin_layout Labeling
14824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14831 This is text with Strikeout on.
14837 arg "font-strikeout"
14841 \begin_inset Newline newline
14844 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14845 changed in the meantime.
14848 \begin_layout Labeling
14849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14856 This is text with Noun on.
14863 , this is a logical attribute.
14864 Normally it's equivalent to
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14876 \begin_layout Standard
14877 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14878 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14880 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14882 \begin_inset space ~
14885 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14891 arg "dialog-show character"
14894 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14895 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14898 arg "textstyle-apply"
14902 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14906 \begin_layout Standard
14907 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14914 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14915 (suppose you just set the shape to
14916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14946 \begin_layout Standard
14947 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14955 \begin_inset space ~
14967 \begin_layout Itemize
14973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14980 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14998 \begin_inset Newline newline
15002 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15016 \begin_inset Note Note
15019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15020 For more on phantoms see section
15021 \begin_inset space ~
15025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15027 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15037 \begin_inset Newline newline
15043 \begin_layout Itemize
15048 fonts use characters with serifs.
15049 These are the small
15050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15057 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15058 The following example shows the difference:
15059 \begin_inset Newline newline
15063 \begin_inset Newline newline
15068 text without serifs
15071 \begin_inset Newline newline
15074 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15075 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15082 \begin_layout Itemize
15087 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15088 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15089 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15092 \begin_layout Standard
15093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15101 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15104 \begin_inset space ~
15109 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15110 the property to be removed.
15111 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15112 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15113 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15131 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15132 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15140 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15144 \begin_inset space ~
15149 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15160 If you, for example, set
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 \begin_inset space ~
15184 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15193 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15196 \begin_layout Standard
15197 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15198 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15201 \begin_layout Section
15202 Printing and Previewing
15205 \begin_layout Subsection
15209 \begin_layout Standard
15210 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15211 using \SpecialChar LyX
15212 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15213 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15214 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15215 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15217 Additional Features
15222 \begin_layout Standard
15224 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15227 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15228 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15229 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15232 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15233 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15234 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15235 to turn your writing into printable output.
15236 This happens in two stages:
15239 \begin_layout Enumerate
15240 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15241 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15243 a file with the extension,
15244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15258 \begin_layout Enumerate
15259 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15260 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15261 to use the commands in the
15265 file to produce printable output.
15268 \begin_layout Subsection
15269 Output file formats
15270 \begin_inset Index idx
15273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15282 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15290 Simple text (ASCII)
15291 \begin_inset Index idx
15294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15295 File formats ! ASCII
15303 \begin_layout Standard
15304 This file type has the extension
15305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15317 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15328 \begin_layout Standard
15329 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15331 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15332 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15334 \begin_inset space ~
15340 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15341 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15342 bibliography (section
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15349 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15354 If your document includes such material, use
15356 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15363 \begin_inset space ~
15367 \begin_inset space ~
15375 \begin_inset space ~
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15385 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15386 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15392 \begin_inset Index idx
15395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15396 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 \begin_layout Standard
15406 This file type has the extension
15407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15418 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15421 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15423 -Errors or to process it manually
15424 with console commands.
15425 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15426 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15427 's temporary directory whenever you
15428 view or export your document.
15431 \begin_layout Standard
15432 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15433 -file using the menu
15435 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15436 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15440 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15441 export variants are explained in section
15442 \begin_inset space ~
15446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15448 reference "subsec:Export"
15455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15457 \begin_inset Index idx
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 \begin_layout Standard
15470 This file type has the extension
15471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15491 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15492 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15493 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15497 \begin_layout Standard
15498 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15499 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15500 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15501 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15502 when you view the DVI.
15503 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15506 \begin_layout Standard
15507 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15509 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15510 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15515 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15516 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15518 \begin_inset space ~
15524 The latter option uses the program
15526 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15532 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15536 font access (see section
15537 \begin_inset space ~
15541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15543 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15548 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15549 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15556 \begin_inset Index idx
15559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15560 File formats ! PostScript
15568 \begin_layout Standard
15569 This file type has the extension
15570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15582 PostScript was developed by the company
15586 as a printer language.
15587 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15589 PostScript can be seen as a
15590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15593 programming language
15594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15609 \begin_inset Index idx
15612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15614 -packages ! pstricks
15624 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15627 \begin_layout Standard
15628 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15632 Encapsulated PostScript
15633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15636 (EPS, file extension
15637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15649 As \SpecialChar LyX
15650 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15651 convert them in the background to EPS.
15652 If, for example, you have 50
15653 \begin_inset space ~
15656 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15658 \begin_inset space ~
15661 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15662 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15664 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15665 EPS to avoid this problem.
15668 \begin_layout Standard
15669 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15671 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15672 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15678 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15680 \begin_inset Index idx
15683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15690 \begin_inset Index idx
15693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15702 \begin_layout Standard
15703 This file type has the extension
15704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15720 Portable Document Format
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15728 was derived from PostScript.
15729 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15738 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15739 looks exactly the same.
15742 \begin_layout Standard
15743 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15747 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15751 (JPG, file extension
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15779 Portable Network Graphics
15780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15783 (PNG, file extension
15784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15796 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15797 converts them in the
15798 background to one of these formats.
15799 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15800 will slow down your workflow.
15801 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15804 \begin_layout Standard
15805 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15807 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15813 \begin_layout Description
15815 \begin_inset space ~
15818 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15822 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15825 \begin_layout Description
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15834 ) This uses the program
15836 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15839 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15842 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15845 is a new engine, derived from
15849 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15850 access (see section
15851 \begin_inset space ~
15855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15857 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15862 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15863 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15868 \begin_layout Description
15870 \begin_inset space ~
15877 ) This uses the program
15882 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15888 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15889 font access (see section
15890 \begin_inset space ~
15894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15896 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15901 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15902 vertically written Japanese.
15905 \begin_layout Description
15907 \begin_inset space ~
15910 (cropped) This is the same as
15913 \begin_inset space ~
15918 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15919 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15920 to generate good-looking
15921 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15924 \begin_layout Description
15926 \begin_inset space ~
15929 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15933 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15937 \begin_layout Description
15939 \begin_inset space ~
15942 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15946 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15947 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15951 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15952 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15955 \begin_layout Standard
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15968 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15969 works without problems.
15970 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15971 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15975 \begin_inset space ~
15983 \begin_inset space ~
15988 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15998 \begin_inset Index idx
16001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16002 FileFormats ! XHTML
16008 \begin_inset Index idx
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 This file type has the extension
16022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16034 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16035 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16036 When \SpecialChar LyX
16037 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16038 suitable for the purpose.
16039 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16045 between different formats, which are described in section
16047 Math Output in XHTML
16052 \begin_inset space ~
16060 \begin_layout Standard
16061 XHTML output remains
16062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16069 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16070 features are supported yet.
16074 and the World Wide Web
16078 Additional Features
16080 manual, for more information.
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16086 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16087 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16093 \begin_layout Subsection
16095 \begin_inset Index idx
16098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16107 \begin_layout Standard
16108 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16109 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16118 or use the toolbar button
16125 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16126 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16127 \begin_inset space ~
16131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16133 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16137 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16145 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16150 Further output formats can be selected via
16152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16153 View (Other Formats)
16155 or the toolbar button
16164 \begin_layout Standard
16165 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16166 viewer window using the menu
16168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16174 Update (Other Formats)
16179 \begin_layout Standard
16180 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16183 To have a real output, export your document.
16186 \begin_layout Section
16187 A few Words about Typography
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_layout Subsection
16201 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16202 \begin_inset Index idx
16205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16212 \begin_inset Index idx
16215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16224 \begin_layout Standard
16225 In \SpecialChar LyX
16227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16238 character comes in four lengths: the
16250 , and the minus sign:
16251 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16257 \begin_layout Standard
16258 \begin_inset Tabular
16259 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16260 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16262 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16263 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16264 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16293 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16333 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16360 \begin_inset space ~
16363 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16370 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16397 \begin_inset space ~
16400 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16421 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16461 \begin_layout Standard
16462 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16474 character multiple times in a row.
16475 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16476 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16509 \begin_layout Standard
16510 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16511 math mode and has a length of its own.
16512 Here are some examples:
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 line- and page-breaks
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16529 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16539 \begin_layout Enumerate
16540 Oh — there's a dash.
16541 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16551 \begin_layout Enumerate
16552 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16556 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16566 \begin_layout Subsection
16568 \begin_inset Index idx
16571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16580 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16587 \begin_layout Standard
16588 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16589 but automatically in the output.
16590 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16596 \begin_inset Index idx
16599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16606 following the rules of the document language.
16609 \begin_layout Standard
16611 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16615 font and with unusual constructs, like
16616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16624 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16626 This is done with the menu
16628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16629 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16631 \begin_inset space ~
16637 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16639 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16643 \begin_layout Standard
16644 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16645 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16656 would then see the hyphen
16657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16664 as a hyphenation possibility.
16665 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16666 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16667 as described in section
16669 Prevent Hyphenation
16674 \begin_inset space ~
16682 \begin_layout Subsection
16684 \begin_inset Index idx
16687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16697 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16700 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16707 \begin_layout Standard
16708 When \SpecialChar LyX
16709 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16710 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16712 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16718 appropriate amount of space.
16719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16722 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16724 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16725 gets after another word.
16728 \begin_layout Standard
16729 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16730 not work in all cases.
16732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16743 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16744 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16747 \begin_layout Standard
16748 Here are some examples of
16752 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16760 \begin_layout Itemize
16765 \begin_layout Standard
16766 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16769 \begin_layout Itemize
16771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16775 this is too much space!
16778 \begin_layout Itemize
16783 \begin_layout Standard
16784 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16787 \begin_layout Standard
16788 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16791 \begin_layout Enumerate
16795 \begin_inset space ~
16800 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16801 \begin_inset space ~
16805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16807 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16812 \begin_inset Index idx
16815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16816 Spaces ! inter-word
16824 \begin_layout Enumerate
16828 \begin_inset space ~
16833 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16834 \begin_inset space ~
16838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16840 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16845 \begin_inset Index idx
16848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16857 \begin_layout Enumerate
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16865 \begin_inset space ~
16869 \begin_inset space ~
16876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16878 \begin_inset space ~
16883 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16884 This function is also bound to
16887 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16893 \begin_layout Standard
16894 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16897 \begin_layout Itemize
16899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16903 \begin_inset space \space{}
16906 this is too much space!
16909 \begin_layout Itemize
16910 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16914 \begin_layout Standard
16915 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16916 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16918 will take care of this.
16921 \begin_layout Standard
16922 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16926 \begin_inset space ~
16932 feature described in the section
16934 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16939 Additional Features
16944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16946 \begin_inset Index idx
16949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16950 Typography ! Quotation marks
16956 \begin_inset Index idx
16959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16960 Quotation marks | see
16964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16990 \begin_layout Standard
16992 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
16993 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
16994 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
16996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17004 The keyboard character,
17008 , generates this automatically.
17011 \begin_layout Standard
17012 You can specify what character the
17016 key produces by using the submenu
17022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17026 \begin_inset Index idx
17029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17030 Document ! Settings
17035 dialog and switching the
17039 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17040 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17042 \begin_inset space ~
17048 \begin_layout Labeling
17049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 \begin_inset space ~
17065 \begin_inset space ~
17069 \begin_inset Quotes els
17073 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17087 \begin_inset Quotes els
17091 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17094 quotation marks (as common, e.
17095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17101 \begin_layout Labeling
17102 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17105 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17109 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17113 \begin_inset space ~
17117 \begin_inset space ~
17121 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17125 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17131 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17135 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17139 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17143 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17146 quotation marks (as common, e.
17147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17153 \begin_layout Labeling
17154 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17157 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17161 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17165 \begin_inset space ~
17169 \begin_inset space ~
17173 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17177 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17183 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17187 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17191 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17195 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17198 quotation marks (as common, e.
17199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17205 \begin_layout Labeling
17206 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17209 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17213 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17217 \begin_inset space ~
17221 \begin_inset space ~
17225 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17229 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17235 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17239 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17243 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17247 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17250 quotation marks (as common, e.
17251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17257 \begin_layout Labeling
17258 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17261 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17265 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17269 \begin_inset space ~
17273 \begin_inset space ~
17277 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17281 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17287 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17291 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17295 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17299 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17302 quotation marks (as common, e.
17303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17306 g., in Switzerland)
17309 \begin_layout Labeling
17310 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17313 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17317 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17325 \begin_inset space ~
17329 \begin_inset Quotes als
17333 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17339 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17343 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17347 \begin_inset Quotes als
17351 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17354 quotation marks (as common, e.
17355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17361 \begin_layout Labeling
17362 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17365 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17369 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17385 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17391 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17395 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17399 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17403 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17406 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17409 \begin_layout Labeling
17410 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17413 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17417 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17421 \begin_inset space ~
17425 \begin_inset space ~
17429 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17433 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17439 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17443 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17447 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17451 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17454 quotation marks (as common, e.
17455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17458 g., in Great Britain)
17461 \begin_layout Labeling
17462 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17465 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17469 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17473 \begin_inset space ~
17477 \begin_inset space ~
17481 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17485 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17491 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17495 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17499 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17503 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17506 quotation marks (as common, e.
17507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17513 \begin_layout Labeling
17514 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17517 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17521 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17525 \begin_inset space ~
17529 \begin_inset space ~
17533 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17537 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17543 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17547 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17551 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17555 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17558 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17563 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17564 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17565 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17566 the inner marks differ).
17574 \begin_layout Labeling
17575 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17578 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17582 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17586 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17598 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17604 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17608 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17612 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17616 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17619 quotation marks (as common, e.
17620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17626 \begin_layout Labeling
17627 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17630 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17634 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17638 \begin_inset space ~
17642 \begin_inset space ~
17646 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17650 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17656 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17660 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17664 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17668 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17671 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17674 \begin_layout Labeling
17675 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17676 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17684 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17700 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17708 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17712 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17716 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17720 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17724 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17727 quotation marks (as common, e.
17728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17736 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17737 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17745 \begin_layout Labeling
17746 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17747 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17755 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17765 \begin_inset space ~
17771 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17779 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17783 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17787 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17791 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17795 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17798 quotation marks (as common, e.
17799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17802 g., in North Korea and China)
17806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17807 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17808 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17816 \begin_layout Standard
17817 Inner quotation marks
17821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17822 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
17823 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
17824 case (and specifically the British style shows that
17825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17832 does not necessarily mean
17833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17841 This is why we call them
17842 \begin_inset Quotes els
17846 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17862 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
17864 \begin_inset Quotes els
17868 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17871 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
17874 arg "quote-insert inner"
17879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17885 \begin_layout Standard
17886 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
17887 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
17888 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
17889 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
17890 If you check the setting
17892 Use dynamic quotation marks
17896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17900 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
17901 they appear in a special color).
17902 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
17903 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
17905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17908 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
17911 \begin_layout Standard
17912 Individual quotation marks (i.
17913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17916 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
17917 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
17921 \begin_layout Subsection
17923 \begin_inset Index idx
17926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17927 Typography ! Ligatures
17933 \begin_inset Index idx
17936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17967 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17974 \begin_layout Standard
17975 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17976 print them as single characters.
17977 These groups are known as
17982 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17983 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17985 Here are the standard ligatures:
17988 \begin_layout Itemize
17992 \begin_layout Itemize
17996 \begin_layout Itemize
18000 \begin_layout Itemize
18004 \begin_layout Itemize
18008 \begin_layout Standard
18009 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18012 \begin_layout Standard
18013 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18014 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18022 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18038 To break a ligature, use
18040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18041 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18061 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18078 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18086 \begin_layout Subsection
18088 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18090 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18092 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18096 \begin_inset Index idx
18099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18109 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18116 \begin_layout Standard
18119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18120 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18124 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18127 \begin_layout Description
18129 The name of the game.
18132 \begin_layout Description
18134 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18138 \begin_layout Description
18140 The \SpecialChar TeX
18141 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18145 \begin_layout Description
18146 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18147 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18152 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18158 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18166 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18167 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18168 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18169 converges to the number
18170 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18173 : The actual version is
18174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18182 , the previous one was
18183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18194 \begin_layout Subsection
18196 \begin_inset Index idx
18199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18208 \begin_layout Standard
18209 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18210 space between two words.
18211 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18221 for units use the menu
18223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18224 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18226 \begin_inset space ~
18234 arg "space-insert thin"
18240 \begin_layout Standard
18241 Here is an example to show the differences:
18244 \begin_layout Standard
18245 \begin_inset Tabular
18246 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18247 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18249 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18256 \begin_inset space ~
18260 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 space between number and unit
18279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18288 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 half space between number and unit
18313 \begin_layout Subsection
18315 \begin_inset Index idx
18318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18319 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18327 \begin_layout Standard
18328 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18330 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18331 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18332 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18333 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18334 These bits of text became known as
18345 \begin_layout Standard
18346 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18347 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18348 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18349 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18350 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18351 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18352 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18353 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18354 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18355 \begin_inset Newline newline
18363 \begin_inset Newline newline
18371 \begin_inset Newline newline
18374 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18375 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18376 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18378 \begin_inset space ~
18382 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18384 key "latexcompanion"
18390 \begin_inset space ~
18394 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18401 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18402 's page break mechanism.
18405 \begin_layout Chapter
18406 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18409 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18416 \begin_layout Standard
18417 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18420 \begin_inset space ~
18426 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18429 \begin_layout Section
18431 \begin_inset Index idx
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18450 \begin_layout Standard
18452 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18455 \begin_layout Description
18458 \begin_inset space ~
18461 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18462 \begin_inset Newline newline
18466 \begin_inset Note Note
18469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18470 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18478 \begin_layout Description
18479 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18480 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18481 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18484 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18485 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18487 \begin_inset space ~
18493 \begin_inset Newline newline
18497 \begin_inset Note Comment
18500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18501 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18510 \begin_layout Description
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18515 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18516 set in the document settings under
18518 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18520 \begin_inset space ~
18526 \begin_inset Newline newline
18530 \begin_inset Newline newline
18534 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18544 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18549 of a comment that appears in the output.
18555 \begin_inset Newline newline
18559 \begin_inset Newline newline
18562 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18565 \begin_layout Standard
18566 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18578 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18581 \begin_layout Section
18583 \begin_inset Index idx
18586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18595 name "sec:Footnotes"
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18604 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18610 or the toolbar button
18613 arg "footnote-insert"
18625 \begin_inset Graphics
18626 filename clipart/footnote.png
18635 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18636 's representation of your footnote.
18646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18665 label, the box will
18669 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18670 Clicking on the box label again will close
18683 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18684 and click on the footnote
18699 \begin_layout Standard
18700 Here is an example footnote:
18708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18709 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18717 \begin_layout Standard
18718 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18719 position where the footnote box is placed.
18720 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18721 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18722 according to the document class.
18724 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18725 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18731 ey are described in the
18734 \begin_inset space ~
18742 \begin_layout Section
18744 \begin_inset Index idx
18747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18756 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18763 \begin_layout Standard
18764 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18766 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18770 \begin_inset space ~
18775 or the toolbar button
18778 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18804 appearing within your text.
18805 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18806 's representation of your margin
18815 \begin_layout Standard
18816 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18820 \begin_inset Marginal
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 This is a marginal note.
18833 \begin_layout Standard
18834 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18835 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18836 pages, right on odd pages.
18839 \begin_layout Standard
18840 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18843 \begin_inset space ~
18851 \begin_inset space ~
18859 \begin_layout Section
18860 Graphics and Images
18861 \begin_inset Index idx
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18871 \begin_inset Index idx
18874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18883 name "sec:Graphics"
18890 \begin_layout Standard
18891 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18892 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18895 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18904 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18907 \begin_layout Standard
18908 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18913 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18914 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18916 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18917 \begin_inset space ~
18921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18923 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18930 \begin_layout Standard
18935 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18936 of the image in the output.
18937 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18941 \begin_inset space ~
18945 \begin_inset space ~
18954 \begin_inset space ~
18958 \begin_inset space ~
18962 \begin_inset space ~
18967 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18968 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18976 \begin_layout Standard
18980 \begin_inset space ~
18984 \begin_inset space ~
18989 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18990 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18992 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18997 \begin_inset space ~
19002 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19003 with the image size is printed.
19006 \begin_layout Standard
19007 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19008 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19010 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19013 \begin_layout Standard
19015 \begin_inset Graphics
19016 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19024 \begin_layout Standard
19025 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19026 the image into a float, see section
19027 \begin_inset space ~
19031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19033 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19040 \begin_layout Subsection
19042 \begin_inset Index idx
19045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19054 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19061 \begin_layout Standard
19062 You can insert images in any known file format.
19063 But as we explained in section
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19070 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19074 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19076 therefore uses the program
19080 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19081 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19082 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19083 \begin_inset space ~
19087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19089 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19097 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19100 \begin_layout Description
19102 \begin_inset space ~
19105 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19106 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19107 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19111 Graphics Interchange Format
19112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19115 (GIF, file extension
19116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19128 \begin_inset Index idx
19131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19163 Portable Network Graphics
19164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19167 (PNG, file extension
19168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19180 \begin_inset Index idx
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19215 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19219 (JPG, file extension
19220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19244 \begin_inset Index idx
19247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19278 \begin_layout Description
19280 \begin_inset space ~
19283 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19285 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19286 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19287 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19288 \begin_inset Newline newline
19291 Scalable image formats can be
19292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19295 Scalable Vector Graphics
19296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19299 (SVG, file extension
19300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19312 \begin_inset Index idx
19315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19347 Encapsulated PostScript
19348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19351 (EPS, file extension
19352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19364 \begin_inset Index idx
19367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19399 Portable Document Format
19400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19403 (PDF, file extension
19404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19416 \begin_inset Index idx
19419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19434 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19435 result will not be scalable.
19436 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19442 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19450 \begin_layout Standard
19451 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19458 \begin_layout Subsection
19459 Grouping of Image Settings
19460 \begin_inset Index idx
19463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19464 Images ! Settings grouping
19472 \begin_layout Standard
19473 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19475 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19476 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19478 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19479 need to manually change each of them.
19483 \begin_layout Standard
19484 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19487 \begin_inset space ~
19491 \begin_inset space ~
19503 \begin_inset space ~
19507 \begin_inset space ~
19513 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19514 and checking the name of the desired group.
19517 \begin_layout Section
19519 \begin_inset Index idx
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19538 \begin_layout Standard
19539 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19542 arg "tabular-insert"
19547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19551 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19552 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19553 from the rest of the table.
19554 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19555 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19557 Here is an example table:
19560 \begin_layout Standard
19562 \begin_inset Tabular
19563 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19564 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 \begin_layout Subsection
19772 \begin_layout Standard
19773 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19776 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19780 This brings up the table dialog.
19781 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19782 cursor is placed currently.
19783 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19784 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19785 done on all of your selection.
19788 \begin_layout Standard
19789 In addition to the table dialog, the
19792 \begin_inset space ~
19797 helps you in setting table properties.
19798 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19801 \begin_layout Standard
19805 \begin_inset space ~
19810 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19811 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19812 current cell respectively.
19813 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19815 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19816 of text, see section
19817 \begin_inset space ~
19821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19823 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19830 \begin_layout Standard
19831 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19832 using the check box
19841 This will merge the cells to
19845 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19846 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19847 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19848 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19849 in the last row without the upper border:
19852 \begin_layout Standard
19854 \begin_inset Tabular
19855 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19856 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19858 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19991 \begin_layout Standard
19992 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19993 -arguments for the table.
19994 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19995 explained in the chapter
20002 \begin_inset space ~
20008 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20009 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20010 but are visible in the output.
20013 \begin_layout Standard
20014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 Most DVI-viewers are
20026 able to display rotations.
20034 \begin_layout Standard
20039 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20044 adds lines for all cell borders.
20047 \begin_layout Subsection
20049 \begin_inset Index idx
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20053 Tables ! Multi-page
20059 \begin_inset Index idx
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 \begin_layout Standard
20072 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20075 \begin_inset space ~
20079 \begin_inset space ~
20087 \begin_inset space ~
20092 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20093 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20096 \begin_layout Description
20101 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20102 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20103 Except for the first page, if
20106 \begin_inset space ~
20114 \begin_layout Description
20118 \begin_inset space ~
20123 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20124 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20127 \begin_layout Description
20132 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20133 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20134 except for the last page, if
20137 \begin_inset space ~
20145 \begin_layout Description
20149 \begin_inset space ~
20154 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20155 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20158 \begin_layout Description
20159 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20160 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20166 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20169 \begin_inset space ~
20177 \begin_layout Standard
20178 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20179 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20180 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20186 In this context, first means first in this order:
20189 \begin_inset space ~
20201 \begin_inset space ~
20206 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20209 \begin_layout Standard
20211 \begin_inset Tabular
20212 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20213 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20214 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20215 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20216 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20217 <row endfirsthead="true">
20218 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20229 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 <row endfirsthead="true">
20249 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 <row endhead="true">
20282 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20302 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 <row endhead="true">
20313 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <row endfoot="true">
20346 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20397 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 <row endlastfoot="true">
22328 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 \begin_layout Subsection
22367 \begin_inset Index idx
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22379 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22386 \begin_layout Standard
22387 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22388 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22389 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22390 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22394 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22397 \begin_layout Standard
22398 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22399 for the column in the table dialog.
22400 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22401 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22405 \begin_layout Standard
22407 \begin_inset Tabular
22408 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22409 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22411 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22557 This is longer now.
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22614 This is longer now.
22619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 \begin_layout Standard
22646 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22647 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22652 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22653 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22659 Selection with the mouse or with
22663 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22664 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22665 the selection from outside the table.
22668 \begin_layout Section
22670 \begin_inset Index idx
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22689 \begin_layout Subsection
22693 \begin_layout Standard
22694 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22695 have a fixed location.
22697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22704 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22712 \begin_inset space ~
22717 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22718 too many notes on the current page.
22721 \begin_layout Standard
22722 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22723 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22724 and pages without text.
22725 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22726 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22727 Floats are therefore numbered.
22728 Referencing is described in section
22729 \begin_inset space ~
22733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22735 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22742 \begin_layout Standard
22743 To insert a float, use the menu
22745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22749 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22750 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22752 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22753 \begin_inset Index idx
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22763 paragraph within the float.
22764 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22765 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22766 left-clicking on the box label.
22767 A closed float box looks like this:
22768 \begin_inset Graphics
22769 filename clipart/float.png
22774 – a gray button with a red label.
22777 \begin_layout Standard
22778 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22780 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22783 \begin_layout Subsection
22785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22787 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22792 \begin_inset Index idx
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22796 Floats ! Figure floats
22804 \begin_layout Standard
22806 \begin_inset space ~
22810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22812 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22816 was created using the menu
22818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22819 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22825 arg "float-insert figure"
22829 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22838 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22842 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22843 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22845 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22847 \begin_inset space ~
22855 arg "layout-paragraph"
22861 \begin_layout Standard
22862 \begin_inset Float figure
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 \begin_inset Graphics
22870 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22885 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22889 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22902 \begin_layout Standard
22903 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22904 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22915 ) and refer to it using the menu
22917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22923 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22927 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22928 vague references like
22929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22936 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22937 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22947 For more about cross-references, see section
22948 \begin_inset space ~
22952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22954 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22961 \begin_layout Standard
22962 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22963 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22964 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22965 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22966 as described in section
22967 \begin_inset space ~
22971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22973 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22979 \begin_inset space ~
22983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22985 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22989 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22990 You can also set the images one below the other.
22992 \begin_inset space ~
22996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22998 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23005 reference "fig:Platypus"
23009 are the subfigures.
23012 \begin_layout Standard
23013 \begin_inset Float figure
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23023 \begin_inset Float figure
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23034 name "fig:Undefinable"
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 \begin_inset Graphics
23048 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23059 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23063 \begin_inset Float figure
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23074 name "fig:Platypus"
23086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 \begin_inset Graphics
23088 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23100 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23112 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23116 Two distorted images.
23129 \begin_layout Subsection
23131 \begin_inset Index idx
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 Floats ! Table floats
23143 \begin_layout Standard
23144 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23147 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23150 or the toolbar button
23153 arg "float-insert table"
23157 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23158 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23159 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23161 \begin_inset space ~
23165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23167 reference "tab:Table-float"
23174 \begin_layout Standard
23175 \begin_inset Float table
23180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23186 name "tab:Table-float"
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_inset Tabular
23201 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23202 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23332 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23356 \end{array}\right]$
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23398 \begin_layout Subsection
23400 \begin_inset Index idx
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 \begin_layout Standard
23414 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23415 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23416 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23418 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23426 \begin_inset space ~
23434 \begin_layout Section
23436 \begin_inset Index idx
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 \begin_layout Standard
23450 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23452 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23453 \begin_inset space \space{}
23460 \begin_layout Standard
23461 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23462 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23468 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23469 and its alignment within the page.
23472 \begin_layout Standard
23474 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23484 height_special "totalheight"
23489 backgroundcolor "none"
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 This is a minipage.
23496 The text is set in an italic style.
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23502 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23503 another formatting.
23511 \begin_layout Standard
23512 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23515 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23519 as described in section
23520 \begin_inset space ~
23524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23526 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23531 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23537 \begin_layout Standard
23538 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23548 height_special "totalheight"
23553 backgroundcolor "none"
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23557 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23558 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23564 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23568 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23578 height_special "totalheight"
23583 backgroundcolor "none"
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23588 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23596 \begin_layout Standard
23597 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23603 \begin_layout Standard
23604 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23606 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23613 \begin_inset space ~
23621 \begin_layout Chapter
23622 Mathematical Formulas
23623 \begin_inset Index idx
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 \begin_inset Index idx
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23667 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23674 \begin_layout Standard
23675 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23680 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23683 \begin_layout Section
23685 \begin_inset Index idx
23688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 \begin_layout Standard
23698 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23711 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23713 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23714 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23715 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23717 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23723 \begin_layout Standard
23724 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23728 \begin_inset space ~
23733 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23736 \begin_layout Standard
23737 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23738 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23741 \begin_layout Standard
23742 This is a line with an inline formula
23743 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23749 \begin_layout Standard
23750 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23751 paragraph, like this one:
23752 \begin_inset Formula
23759 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23762 \begin_layout Standard
23764 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23766 For example, typing
23767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23780 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23781 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23785 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23788 \begin_inset space ~
23796 \begin_layout Subsection
23797 Navigating in Formulas
23798 \begin_inset Index idx
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 \begin_layout Standard
23811 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23812 achieved with the arrow keys.
23814 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23815 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23820 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23821 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23825 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23829 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23832 \end{array}\right]$
23840 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23845 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23846 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23849 \begin_layout Standard
23854 , printed in this document as
23855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23859 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23866 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23867 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23868 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23873 For example, if you want
23874 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23882 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23892 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23896 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23901 , since in the latter case only the
23904 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23909 will be under the square root sign:
23910 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23916 \begin_layout Standard
23917 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23919 \begin_inset Formula
23921 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23930 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23931 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23934 \begin_layout Subsection
23938 \begin_layout Standard
23939 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23940 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23944 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23945 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23946 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23947 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23948 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23952 \begin_layout Subsection
23953 Exponents and Subscripts
23954 \begin_inset Index idx
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 \begin_inset Index idx
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 \begin_layout Standard
23977 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23980 arg "math-superscript"
23986 arg "math-subscript"
23989 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23991 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23994 , type in a formula
23997 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24007 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24013 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24017 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24029 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24038 , you have to use an extra
24042 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24043 For example, if you want
24044 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24050 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24056 Subscripts are similar: To get
24057 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24063 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24071 \begin_layout Subsection
24073 \begin_inset Index idx
24076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24085 \begin_layout Standard
24086 Create a fraction either with the command
24092 or by using the icon
24095 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24101 \begin_inset space ~
24107 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24108 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24109 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24114 To move back up, press
24119 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24120 \begin_inset Formula
24122 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24125 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24133 \begin_layout Subsection
24135 \begin_inset Index idx
24138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 \begin_layout Standard
24148 Roots can be created using the
24151 \begin_inset space ~
24159 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24165 arg "math-insert \\root"
24187 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24193 always produces a square root.
24196 \begin_layout Subsection
24197 Operators with Limits
24198 \begin_inset Index idx
24201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24208 \begin_inset Index idx
24211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24220 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24227 \begin_layout Standard
24229 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24233 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24236 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24237 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24238 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24239 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24240 The sum operator will automatically place its
24241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24248 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24250 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24254 \begin_inset Formula
24256 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24261 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24265 \begin_layout Standard
24266 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24268 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24269 behind the operator and using the menu
24271 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24272 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24274 \begin_inset space ~
24278 \begin_inset space ~
24292 \begin_layout Standard
24293 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24302 \begin_inset Index idx
24305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24312 \begin_inset Formula
24314 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24319 which will place the
24320 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24332 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24333 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24339 \begin_layout Standard
24340 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24347 Have a look at section
24348 \begin_inset space ~
24352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24354 reference "subsec:Functions"
24358 for an explanation of function macros.
24361 \begin_layout Subsection
24363 \begin_inset Index idx
24366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 \begin_layout Standard
24376 Most math symbols can be found in the
24379 \begin_inset space ~
24384 under one of several categories; including
24401 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24405 \begin_layout Standard
24406 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24407 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24408 don't have to use the
24411 \begin_inset space ~
24416 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24418 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24421 \begin_layout Subsection
24423 \begin_inset Index idx
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 \begin_layout Standard
24436 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24442 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24448 \begin_inset space ~
24456 arg "math-insert \\space"
24460 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24461 For example, the sequence
24466 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24469 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24471 \begin_inset Graphics
24472 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24477 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24478 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24479 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24480 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24481 , because they are negative
24483 Here are two examples:
24486 \begin_layout Standard
24496 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24502 \begin_layout Standard
24512 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24518 \begin_layout Subsection
24520 \begin_inset Index idx
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24532 name "subsec:Functions"
24539 \begin_layout Standard
24543 \begin_inset space ~
24548 contains under the button
24551 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24554 a number of function macros, such as
24555 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24559 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24567 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24574 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24575 avoid confusions, because
24576 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24580 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24586 \begin_layout Standard
24587 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24589 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24593 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24599 \begin_layout Standard
24600 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24601 are placed, as described in section
24602 \begin_inset space ~
24606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24608 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24615 \begin_layout Subsection
24617 \begin_inset Index idx
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24632 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24633 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24634 commands, for example, to enter
24635 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24638 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24639 Our example is entered by typing
24644 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24651 \begin_inset space ~
24655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24657 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24661 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24664 \begin_layout Standard
24665 \begin_inset Float table
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24671 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24676 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24680 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 \begin_inset Tabular
24691 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24692 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24693 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24694 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24695 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24779 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24887 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24995 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25103 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25256 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25277 \begin_layout Standard
25278 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25281 \begin_inset space ~
25289 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25292 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25296 \begin_layout Section
25297 Brackets and Delimiters
25298 \begin_inset Index idx
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 \begin_inset Index idx
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25320 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25327 \begin_layout Standard
25328 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25330 For some purposes, using just the keys
25335 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25336 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25337 toolbar delimiter icon
25340 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25344 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25345 \begin_inset Formula
25347 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25355 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25356 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25360 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25363 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25369 \begin_inset Formula
25371 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25379 \begin_layout Standard
25380 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25381 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25385 \begin_layout Standard
25386 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25387 left side and right side.
25388 If you use the option
25391 \begin_inset space ~
25396 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25397 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25399 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25404 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25405 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25408 \begin_layout Standard
25409 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25410 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25411 is to go inside the brackets.
25412 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25417 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25418 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25419 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25423 arg "math-delim ( )"
25429 \begin_layout Section
25430 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25431 \begin_inset Index idx
25434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 \begin_inset Index idx
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 \begin_inset Index idx
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25455 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25463 \begin_layout Standard
25464 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25468 \begin_inset space ~
25476 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25480 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25481 Here is an example:
25482 \begin_inset Formula
25484 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25493 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25494 \begin_inset space ~
25498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25500 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25505 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25506 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25507 This alignment is set in the box
25512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25561 for every column as default.
25562 For example, the sequence
25563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25574 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25575 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25576 corresponds to the relevant column.
25577 The result will look like this:
25578 \begin_inset Formula
25581 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25582 column & has & has\,right\\
25583 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25592 \begin_layout Standard
25593 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25596 arg "newline-insert newline"
25599 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25600 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25605 or the math toolbar.
25608 \begin_layout Standard
25609 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25610 It can be created with the menu
25612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25613 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25615 \begin_inset space ~
25627 Here is an example:
25628 \begin_inset Formula
25642 \begin_layout Standard
25643 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25646 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25649 arg "newline-insert newline"
25653 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25658 arg "newline-insert newline"
25661 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25669 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25670 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25671 A new row is created by every further entry of
25674 arg "newline-insert newline"
25678 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25679 Here is an example:
25680 \begin_inset Formula
25682 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25683 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25688 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25689 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25690 \begin_inset Formula
25692 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25700 \begin_layout Standard
25701 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25708 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25709 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25712 reference "eq:asquared"
25717 The other types are described in section
25718 \begin_inset space ~
25722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25724 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25731 \begin_layout Section
25732 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25733 \begin_inset Index idx
25736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25737 Math ! Formula numbering
25743 \begin_inset Index idx
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25747 Math ! Referencing formulas
25753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25755 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25762 \begin_layout Standard
25763 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25765 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25766 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25768 \begin_inset space ~
25772 \begin_inset space ~
25780 arg "math-number-toggle"
25784 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25785 within parentheses.
25786 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25787 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25788 the document class.
25789 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25790 separated by a dot:
25791 \begin_inset Formula
25801 arg "math-number-toggle"
25804 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25805 You can only number displayed formulas.
25808 \begin_layout Standard
25809 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25811 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25812 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25814 \begin_inset space ~
25818 \begin_inset space ~
25826 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25829 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25830 \begin_inset Formula
25833 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25839 To number all lines use the shortcut
25842 arg "math-number-toggle"
25848 \begin_layout Standard
25849 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25852 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25853 A label is inserted with the menu
25855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25864 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25865 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25866 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25878 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25879 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25880 We inserted in the following example the label
25881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25888 in the second line:
25889 \begin_inset Formula
25891 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25892 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25897 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25898 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25899 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25903 \begin_inset space ~
25911 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25915 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25916 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25917 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25918 as the formula number:
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25922 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25925 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25932 \begin_layout Standard
25933 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25934 's cross-reference box are described in section
25935 \begin_inset space ~
25939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25941 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25946 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25954 \begin_layout Section
25955 User defined math macros
25956 \begin_inset Index idx
25959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25968 \begin_layout Standard
25970 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25971 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25972 Math macros are explained in section
25975 \begin_inset space ~
25987 \begin_layout Section
25991 \begin_layout Subsection
25993 \begin_inset Index idx
25996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26005 \begin_layout Standard
26006 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26007 To set a font in a formula, use the
26010 \begin_inset space ~
26018 arg "math-insert \\font"
26021 , or enter its command, listed in table
26022 \begin_inset space ~
26026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26028 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 \begin_inset Float table
26041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26047 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26051 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26061 \begin_inset Tabular
26062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26097 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26124 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26151 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26184 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26211 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26238 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26272 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26299 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26333 \begin_layout Standard
26334 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26342 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26358 \begin_layout Standard
26359 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26360 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26365 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26366 space when you need a space in the box.
26367 Here is an example where
26368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26379 denotes the set of numbers:
26380 \begin_inset Formula
26382 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26390 \begin_layout Standard
26391 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26392 You can, for example, put a character in
26401 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26405 \begin_inset Newline newline
26408 So it is better not to use this feature.
26411 \begin_layout Standard
26412 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26413 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26417 \begin_inset Newline newline
26420 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26426 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26427 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26440 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26443 \begin_layout Standard
26444 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26446 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26447 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26449 \begin_inset space ~
26457 \begin_layout Subsection
26459 \begin_inset Index idx
26462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26471 \begin_layout Standard
26472 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26474 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26478 \begin_inset space ~
26482 \begin_inset space ~
26490 \begin_inset space ~
26498 arg "math-insert \\font"
26502 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26503 in black instead of blue.
26504 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26505 Here is an example:
26506 \begin_inset Formula
26509 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26510 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26519 \begin_layout Subsection
26521 \begin_inset Index idx
26524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26533 \begin_layout Standard
26534 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26535 automatically chosen in most situations.
26553 For most characters,
26561 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26562 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26567 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26568 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26569 thinks are appropriate.
26570 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26573 arg "math-insert \\style"
26577 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26578 For example, you can set
26579 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26582 , which is normally in
26591 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26595 The four styles are used in the following example:
26598 \begin_layout Standard
26599 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26603 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26607 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26611 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26617 \begin_layout Standard
26618 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26619 is set in a particular size with the menu
26621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26623 \begin_inset space ~
26628 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26629 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26630 will be adjusted to correspond.
26631 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26642 \begin_layout Standard
26646 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26652 \begin_layout Section
26653 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26655 \begin_inset Index idx
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26665 \begin_inset Index idx
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26677 \begin_layout Standard
26679 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26680 that are in common use.
26683 \begin_layout Subsection
26684 Enabling AMS-Support
26687 \begin_layout Standard
26688 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26689 the document by selecting the checkbox
26692 \begin_inset space ~
26696 \begin_inset space ~
26700 \begin_inset space ~
26707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26711 \begin_inset Index idx
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26715 Document ! Settings
26723 \begin_inset space ~
26729 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26730 -errors in formulas,
26731 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26734 \begin_layout Subsection
26736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26738 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26743 \begin_inset Index idx
26746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26747 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26755 \begin_layout Standard
26756 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26757 provides a selection of different formula types.
26759 allows you to choose between
26780 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26788 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26791 \begin_layout Chapter
26795 \begin_layout Section
26797 \begin_inset Index idx
26800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26809 name "sec:Cross-References"
26816 \begin_layout Standard
26817 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26818 's strengths is cross-references.
26819 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26821 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26822 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26823 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26826 \begin_layout Enumerate
26830 \begin_layout Enumerate
26831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26833 name "enu:Second-item"
26840 \begin_layout Enumerate
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26850 or by pressing the toolbar button
26857 A gray label box like this:
26858 \begin_inset Graphics
26859 filename clipart/label.png
26863 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26865 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26900 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26901 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26917 \begin_layout Standard
26918 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26923 or the toolbar button
26926 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26930 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26931 \begin_inset Graphics
26932 filename clipart/reference.png
26936 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26938 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26951 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26955 \begin_layout Standard
26956 As an alternative to
26958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26961 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26966 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26967 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26969 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26981 \begin_layout Standard
26982 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26983 \begin_inset space ~
26987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26989 reference "enu:Second-item"
26996 \begin_layout Standard
26997 It is recommended to use a protected space
27001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27002 described in section
27003 \begin_inset space ~
27007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27009 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27018 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27019 line breaks between them.
27022 \begin_layout Standard
27023 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27026 \begin_layout Description
27027 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27030 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27037 \begin_layout Description
27038 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27039 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27051 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27058 \begin_layout Description
27059 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27060 \begin_inset space ~
27064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27065 LatexCommand pageref
27066 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27073 \begin_layout Description
27075 \begin_inset space ~
27079 \begin_inset space ~
27082 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27084 LatexCommand vpageref
27085 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27090 \begin_inset Newline newline
27093 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27094 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27095 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27096 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27097 it prints “on the next page”.
27098 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27101 \begin_layout Description
27103 \begin_inset space ~
27107 \begin_inset space ~
27111 \begin_inset space ~
27114 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27117 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27122 \begin_inset Newline newline
27125 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27131 ; otherwise it behaves like
27135 \begin_inset space ~
27139 \begin_inset space ~
27148 \begin_layout Description
27150 \begin_inset space ~
27153 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27154 \begin_inset Newline newline
27158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27166 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27176 \begin_inset Index idx
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27181 -packages ! prettyref
27187 \begin_inset Index idx
27190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27192 -packages ! refstyle
27203 \begin_inset Newline newline
27206 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27207 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27210 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27215 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27223 is the default and preferred because
27227 supports only English documents.
27228 The format is specified by using the command
27240 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27241 preamble of the document.
27242 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27260 \begin_inset Newline newline
27267 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27272 \begin_inset Newline newline
27283 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27284 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27286 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27287 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27292 , you might do so as follows:
27293 \begin_inset Newline newline
27300 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27305 \begin_inset Newline newline
27308 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27309 the package documentation
27310 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27312 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27318 \begin_inset Newline newline
27329 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27336 \begin_layout Description
27338 \begin_inset space ~
27341 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27343 LatexCommand nameref
27344 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27351 \begin_layout Description
27353 \begin_inset space ~
27356 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27357 label for the reference:
27358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27359 LatexCommand labelonly
27360 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27365 \begin_inset Newline newline
27368 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27369 Code, if you want to issue a command
27370 that \SpecialChar LyX
27376 , then you may want to use the
27379 \begin_inset space ~
27384 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27394 This is the form needed for e.
27395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27399 \begin_inset space \space{}
27406 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27407 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27409 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27413 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27417 \begin_layout Standard
27418 You can only use the style
27422 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27426 is always possible.
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27430 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27431 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27433 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27434 \begin_inset space ~
27438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27440 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27447 \begin_layout Standard
27448 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27452 \begin_inset space ~
27456 \begin_inset space ~
27461 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27462 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27465 \begin_inset space ~
27470 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27471 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27474 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27480 \begin_layout Standard
27481 You can change labels at any time.
27482 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27483 do not need to think about this.
27486 \begin_layout Standard
27487 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27489 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27493 \begin_layout Standard
27494 References are described in detail in the section
27495 \begin_inset space ~
27505 \begin_inset space ~
27513 \begin_layout Section
27514 Table of Contents and other Listings
27515 \begin_inset Index idx
27518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 \begin_inset Index idx
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27529 Navigating ! Outline
27535 \begin_inset Index idx
27538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27554 \begin_layout Subsection
27556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27558 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27565 \begin_layout Standard
27566 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27569 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27571 \begin_inset space ~
27575 \begin_inset space ~
27581 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27583 If you click on it, the
27587 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27588 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27589 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27591 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27593 \begin_inset space ~
27598 that is described in section
27599 \begin_inset space ~
27603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27605 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27612 \begin_layout Standard
27613 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27614 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27616 \begin_inset space ~
27620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27622 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27626 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27628 \begin_inset space ~
27632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27634 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27638 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27640 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27643 \begin_layout Subsection
27644 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27647 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27654 \begin_layout Standard
27655 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27657 You can insert them via the
27659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27663 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27666 \begin_layout Section
27667 URLs and Hyperlinks
27668 \begin_inset Index idx
27671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27678 \begin_inset Index idx
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27690 \begin_layout Subsection
27692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27702 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27711 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27713 \begin_inset Flex URL
27716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27726 \begin_layout Standard
27727 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27733 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27737 \begin_layout Standard
27738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27746 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27755 \begin_layout Subsection
27757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27759 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27767 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27772 or with the toolbar button
27779 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27788 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27789 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27790 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27792 name "LyX's homepage"
27793 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27798 , an Email address like this:
27799 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27801 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27802 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27808 , or a link to a file.
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27812 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27825 to the link target.
27828 \begin_layout Standard
27829 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27830 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27831 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27832 the text style dialog.
27833 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27839 name "LyX's homepage"
27840 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27848 \begin_layout Standard
27849 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27853 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27855 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27856 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27860 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27862 \begin_inset Newline newline
27870 \begin_inset Newline newline
27877 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27880 \begin_layout Section
27882 \begin_inset Index idx
27885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27894 name "sec:Appendices"
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 Appendices are created with the menu
27904 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27906 \begin_inset space ~
27910 \begin_inset space ~
27916 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27917 as the appendix part of the book.
27918 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27923 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27924 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27925 and the subsection number.
27926 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27930 \begin_layout Standard
27932 \begin_inset space ~
27936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27938 reference "chap:Credits"
27943 \begin_inset space ~
27947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27949 reference "subsec:Export"
27956 \begin_layout Section
27958 \begin_inset Index idx
27961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27970 name "sec:Bibliography"
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27978 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27980 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
27981 \begin_inset space ~
27985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27987 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27994 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
27999 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28000 \begin_inset space ~
28004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28006 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28011 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28013 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28015 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28018 author-year citations,
28019 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28020 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28023 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28025 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28026 should seriously consider
28033 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28035 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28038 a bibliography database.
28039 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28043 \begin_layout Standard
28045 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28046 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28047 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28051 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28052 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28053 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28054 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28055 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28060 \begin_layout Subsection
28061 The Bibliography Environment
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28064 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28071 \begin_layout Standard
28076 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28078 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28087 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28090 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28091 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28092 of ASCII characters only.
28095 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28105 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28106 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28110 \begin_layout Standard
28111 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28116 or the toolbar button
28119 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28123 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28124 containing the available citations.
28125 Select one or more keys from the list and
28135 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28136 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28140 \begin_layout Standard
28141 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28142 entry with surrounding brackets.
28147 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28148 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28160 \begin_layout Standard
28164 Companion Second Edition
28167 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28169 key "latexcompanion"
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 The \SpecialChar LyX
28179 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28180 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28188 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28192 \begin_layout Standard
28194 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28195 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28200 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28212 Author A and Author B(Year)
28213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28220 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28222 Then, if you select
28228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28232 \begin_inset Index idx
28235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28237 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28238 Document ! Settings
28245 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28251 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28258 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28263 \begin_layout Standard
28264 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28269 \begin_inset space ~
28277 arg "layout-paragraph"
28281 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28284 \begin_layout Subsection
28285 Bibliography databases
28286 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28287 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28291 \begin_inset Index idx
28294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28295 Bibliography ! Databases
28301 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28303 \begin_inset Index idx
28306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28307 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28318 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28325 \begin_layout Standard
28326 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28327 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28329 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28332 in different documents.
28336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28337 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28339 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28340 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28345 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28347 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28348 your working field in a database.
28349 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28350 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28351 list for that document.
28352 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 The database is a text file with the file extension
28358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28369 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28370 The format is explained in
28371 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28378 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28380 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28382 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28388 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28389 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28390 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28392 \begin_inset Flex URL
28395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28397 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28403 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28407 \begin_layout Standard
28409 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28411 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28412 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28413 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28415 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28416 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28417 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28419 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28428 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28429 (although it has been significantly
28430 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28437 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28442 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28443 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28444 might conversely fail to correctly
28445 handle databases that use specific
28456 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28460 \begin_layout Standard
28462 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28463 Both approaches are described in turn.
28466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28468 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28469 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28471 \begin_inset Index idx
28474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28476 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28477 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28488 \begin_layout Standard
28490 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28492 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28496 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28497 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28507 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28509 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28513 \begin_inset space ~
28519 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28520 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28521 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28522 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28532 Add bibliography to TOC
28534 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28539 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28540 in the document or just the cited references.
28543 \begin_layout Standard
28545 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28546 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28549 style file is a text file with the file extension
28550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28561 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28562 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28563 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28564 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28566 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28572 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28573 \begin_inset Newline newline
28577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28579 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28590 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28591 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28596 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28602 \begin_layout Standard
28603 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28604 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
28608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28610 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
28612 \begin_inset Index idx
28615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28617 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
28618 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28626 \begin_layout Standard
28628 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
28629 Accessing a database via
28633 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28641 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28643 \begin_inset space ~
28649 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28650 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28652 you cannot select a
28656 file (we will explain later, why).
28657 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28660 Add bibliography to TOC
28662 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28667 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28668 in the document or just the cited references.
28671 \begin_layout Standard
28673 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
28678 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
28680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28691 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
28693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28704 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28705 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
28706 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
28707 bibliography style.
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28712 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
28717 styles are not set in the
28720 \begin_inset space ~
28731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28732 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28736 However, in the former dialog (in the
28740 field which is only visible if you use
28744 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
28745 (for instance concerning its heading).
28746 These options are detailed in the
28751 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28763 \begin_layout Standard
28765 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
28766 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
28767 \begin_inset space ~
28771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28773 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28785 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
28786 Bibliography Processors
28789 \begin_layout Standard
28790 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28792 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
28793 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
28794 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
28799 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
28801 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
28805 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
28811 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
28812 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
28816 \begin_layout Standard
28818 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
28819 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
28821 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
28822 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
28823 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28828 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
28829 do this on a general level in
28831 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28832 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28833 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28836 , or for individual documents
28837 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
28838 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28848 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28850 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
28855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28856 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28857 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28863 The following variants are
28864 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
28866 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
28867 available by default
28872 \begin_layout Description
28874 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
28875 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
28879 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28887 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
28888 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
28889 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
28890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28894 \begin_inset space \space{}
28901 ), only with the package
28904 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
28907 and many specific features
28914 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
28915 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28917 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
28922 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
28931 \begin_layout Description
28932 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28933 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28934 with all bibliography packages,
28935 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
28937 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
28941 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
28942 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
28943 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
28945 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
28951 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
28954 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
28959 \begin_layout Description
28960 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
28961 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
28962 (but no Unicode support)
28964 , larger memory than
28968 , works with all bibliography packages
28969 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
28970 , although more complex
28974 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
28978 features are supported.
28981 \begin_layout Standard
28983 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
28985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28992 bibliography processor set in
28994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29006 bibliography processor in
29008 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29009 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29010 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29013 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29014 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29023 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29024 -based bibliography styles).
29025 This should suit most needs.
29030 \begin_layout Standard
29032 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29033 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29034 By default, this is
29042 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29043 You can adjust it in
29045 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29046 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29047 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29055 \begin_layout Standard
29057 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29058 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29060 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29061 Selected bibliography processors
29063 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29064 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29065 specification of the variants
29066 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29070 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29072 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29076 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29079 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29081 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29087 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29089 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29097 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29109 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29115 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29121 \begin_layout Standard
29123 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29125 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29128 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29129 When you select the option
29131 Sectioned bibliography
29135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29136 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29139 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29143 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29145 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29149 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29153 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29156 are explained in detail in section
29158 Customizing Bibliographies
29162 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29164 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054457
29171 Additional Features
29176 \begin_layout Standard
29178 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29179 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29180 the two methods of creating them.
29181 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29182 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29183 We used the style file
29187 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29192 \begin_layout Subsection
29194 \begin_inset Index idx
29197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29198 Bibliography ! Citation format
29204 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29208 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29217 \begin_layout Standard
29219 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29220 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29225 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29234 ) or author-year citations (as
29235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29244 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29248 \begin_layout Standard
29250 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29251 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29254 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29258 \begin_inset Index idx
29261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29263 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29264 Document ! Settings
29271 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29274 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29275 bibliography approach.
29278 \begin_layout Standard
29280 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29285 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29290 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29294 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29303 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29304 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29312 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29320 Currently, the following options are available:
29323 \begin_layout Itemize
29325 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29332 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29336 \begin_layout Itemize
29338 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29347 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29349 Biblatex citation style
29353 Biblatex bibliography style
29356 Many different style variants are supported.
29361 package can be entered in the
29368 \begin_layout Itemize
29370 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29373 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29383 natbib compatibility mode
29384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29388 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29393 (see below) or want to emulate
29397 behavior very closely.
29402 , this option has some additional styles.
29403 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29408 styles are also supported by this variant.
29411 \begin_layout Itemize
29413 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29422 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29425 \begin_layout Itemize
29427 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29436 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29441 \begin_layout Standard
29443 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29452 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29454 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29459 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29461 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29462 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29479 , a suitable style is proposed).
29484 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29488 \begin_layout Standard
29490 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29491 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29493 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29495 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29498 n the citation reference dialog
29499 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29500 you can set a special citation format
29504 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29505 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29506 a name prefix such as
29507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29522 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29526 e., use or don't use
29527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29536 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29537 For this feature you need to enable the option
29543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29547 \begin_inset Index idx
29550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29551 Document ! Settings
29561 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29562 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29563 style files as explained in
29564 the previous section.
29569 \begin_layout Standard
29571 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29572 In the citation dialog,
29573 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29575 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29578 ou can also set text to appear
29579 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29582 after a citation reference,
29583 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29584 in the citation reference window
29585 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29591 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29609 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29611 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29614 example where the text
29615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29619 \begin_inset space ~
29623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29626 appears after the reference:
29629 \begin_layout Quote
29631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29634 key "latexcompanion"
29640 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29644 \begin_layout Standard
29646 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054733
29647 All styles except for
29651 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29660 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29664 \begin_layout Standard
29666 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
29667 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29668 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
29669 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
29675 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
29676 in a multi-citation (so-called
29677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29680 qualified citation lists
29681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29687 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
29689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29696 window will display three columns:
29697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29721 If you double-click on an item's
29722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29737 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29742 General text before
29743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29754 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29759 \begin_layout Section
29761 \begin_inset Index idx
29764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29785 \begin_inset space ~
29790 or the toolbar button
29797 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29798 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29799 by \SpecialChar LyX
29800 as the index entry.
29803 \begin_layout Standard
29804 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29807 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29809 \begin_inset space ~
29815 A light blue box labeled
29816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29827 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29828 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29832 \begin_layout Standard
29833 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29834 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29835 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29836 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29838 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29840 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29848 \begin_layout Subsection
29849 Grouping Index Entries
29850 \begin_inset Index idx
29853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29862 \begin_layout Standard
29863 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29865 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29866 lists under the entry
29867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29875 First we create the entry
29876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29884 \begin_inset space ~
29888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29890 reference "subsec:Lists"
29895 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29896 \begin_inset space ~
29900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29902 reference "sec:Itemize"
29906 , we insert the command
29909 \begin_layout Standard
29915 \begin_layout Standard
29919 \begin_layout Standard
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 for the enumerated list in section
29927 \begin_inset space ~
29931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29933 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29940 \begin_layout Standard
29941 The exclamation mark
29942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29949 marks the grouping levels.
29950 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29951 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29952 If we don't have an index entry for
29953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29960 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29963 \begin_layout Subsection
29965 \begin_inset Index idx
29968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29969 Index ! Page ranges
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29978 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29980 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29981 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29982 an index entry in section
29983 \begin_inset space ~
29987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29989 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29996 \begin_layout Standard
29999 Paragraph environments|(
30002 \begin_layout Standard
30003 and another entry at the end of section
30004 \begin_inset space ~
30008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30010 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30020 Paragraph environments|)
30023 \begin_layout Standard
30025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30048 respectively start and end the index range.
30049 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30050 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30051 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30052 An example is the index entry
30053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30056 Document ! Settings
30057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30063 \begin_layout Subsection
30065 \begin_inset Index idx
30068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30069 Index ! Cross referencing
30077 \begin_layout Standard
30078 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30079 We referred for example in the index entry
30080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30088 \begin_inset space ~
30092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30094 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30098 ) to the index entry
30099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30106 in the same section using the entry
30109 \begin_layout Standard
30112 GIF|see{Image formats}
30115 \begin_layout Standard
30116 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30118 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30119 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30122 \begin_layout Subsection
30124 \begin_inset Index idx
30127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30128 Index ! Entry order
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30138 follow the rules for the index order.
30139 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30145 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30147 \begin_inset space ~
30151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30153 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30162 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30163 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30188 \begin_inset Index idx
30191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30192 Dummy entries ! maïs
30198 \begin_inset Index idx
30201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30202 Dummy entries ! maître
30208 \begin_inset Index idx
30211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30212 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30217 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30218 maïs, maison, maître.
30219 To achieve this, we use the command
30222 \begin_layout Standard
30225 previous entry@current entry
30228 \begin_layout Standard
30229 In our case we want to have
30230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30245 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30256 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30258 See the next subsection for an example.
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30268 \begin_layout Standard
30269 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30274 to generate the index (see section
30275 \begin_inset space ~
30279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30281 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30290 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30291 -package aeguill in section
30292 \begin_inset space ~
30296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30298 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30302 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30303 -packages although all these index
30304 commands start with
30305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30318 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30323 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30326 \begin_layout Standard
30338 \begin_layout Standard
30350 \begin_layout Subsection
30352 \begin_inset Index idx
30355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30356 Index ! Entry layout
30364 \begin_layout Standard
30365 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30366 \begin_inset Index idx
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30372 This is an italic dummy entry
30377 You can also format the page number using the character
30378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30385 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30386 -command without a backslash.
30387 We can write for example
30390 \begin_layout Standard
30393 italic page number:|textit
30396 \begin_layout Standard
30397 to get the page number in italic.
30398 \begin_inset Index idx
30401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30402 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30407 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30408 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30426 \begin_inset space ~
30432 Have a look at section
30433 \begin_inset space ~
30437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30439 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30443 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30447 \begin_layout Standard
30448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30456 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30460 to generate the index, see section
30461 \begin_inset space ~
30465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30467 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30476 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30481 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30482 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30485 key "latexcompanion"
30498 \begin_layout Standard
30499 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30501 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30502 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30503 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30504 If so, put the following in the preamble
30507 \begin_layout Standard
30519 \begin_layout Standard
30523 \begin_layout Standard
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30530 in the index entry.
30531 \begin_inset Index idx
30534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30535 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30540 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30541 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30542 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30545 \begin_layout Standard
30546 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30547 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30548 a bold font for all index entries.
30549 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30561 documentation for details,
30562 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30564 key "makeindex,xindy"
30572 \begin_layout Subsection
30574 \begin_inset Index idx
30577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30586 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30593 \begin_layout Standard
30594 If the index generation program
30598 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30599 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30603 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30604 distribution, is used.
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30613 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30614 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30615 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30616 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30617 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30627 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30629 dialog, see section
30630 \begin_inset space ~
30634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30636 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30641 The available options are listed and explained in
30642 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30644 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30650 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30654 \begin_layout Standard
30655 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30656 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30660 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30664 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30665 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30668 \begin_layout Subsection
30672 \begin_layout Standard
30673 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30674 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30682 next to the standard index.
30684 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30685 that add this feature.
30692 \begin_inset Index idx
30695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30697 -packages ! splitidx
30702 package to generate multiple indexes.
30703 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30709 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30719 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30720 style, but it also includes
30721 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30722 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30730 \begin_layout Standard
30731 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30732 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30734 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30735 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30738 and select the option
30740 Use multiple Indexes
30747 already contains the standard index
30748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30756 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30757 also appear as a heading) to the
30761 input field and press the
30766 The new index now also appears in the list.
30767 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30768 label color to the new index.
30771 \begin_layout Standard
30772 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30782 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30783 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30784 are additional features:
30787 \begin_layout Itemize
30788 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30789 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30792 \begin_layout Itemize
30793 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30794 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30802 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30803 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30804 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30805 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30808 \begin_layout Section
30809 Nomenclature/Glossary
30810 \begin_inset Index idx
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30820 \begin_inset Index idx
30823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30854 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30861 \begin_layout Standard
30862 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30863 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30864 called nomenclature or glossary.
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30868 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30875 \begin_inset Index idx
30878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 -packages ! nomencl
30886 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30888 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30895 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30899 \begin_layout Standard
30900 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30901 and then use the menu
30903 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30909 \begin_inset space ~
30914 or the toolbar button
30917 arg "nomencl-insert"
30922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30933 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30936 \begin_layout Standard
30937 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30938 The first is the term or
30942 that you wish to define.
30947 of the term or symbol.
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30959 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30960 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30968 \begin_layout Subsection
30969 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30970 \begin_inset Index idx
30973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30974 Nomenclature ! Layout
30982 \begin_layout Standard
30983 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30987 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30994 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31002 \begin_inset Newline newline
31010 \begin_inset Newline newline
31016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31023 character starts/ends the formula.
31024 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31025 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31037 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31047 \begin_layout Standard
31048 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31049 -syntax is given in section
31050 \begin_inset space ~
31054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31056 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31063 \begin_layout Standard
31067 \begin_inset space ~
31072 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31074 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31079 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31086 in this document is:
31087 \begin_inset Newline newline
31092 dummy entry for the character
31097 \begin_inset Newline newline
31109 \begin_inset space ~
31119 font use the command
31148 \begin_layout Standard
31149 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31154 \begin_inset space \space{}
31158 \begin_inset Newline newline
31174 \begin_inset Newline newline
31177 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31178 This command will make the font of all symbols
31185 \begin_inset space ~
31193 \begin_layout Standard
31194 If the characters |
31195 \begin_inset space \space{}
31199 \begin_inset space \space{}
31203 \begin_inset space \space{}
31207 \begin_inset space \space{}
31211 \begin_inset space \space{}
31214 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31215 a quote character in front of them.
31216 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31217 LatexCommand nomenclature
31218 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31219 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31227 \begin_layout Subsection
31228 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31229 \begin_inset Index idx
31232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31233 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31241 \begin_layout Standard
31242 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31243 -code of the symbol
31245 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31247 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31250 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31251 LatexCommand nomenclature
31253 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31261 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31265 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31266 LatexCommand nomenclature
31269 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31275 They will be sorted by
31276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31302 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31305 will be sorted before the
31309 since the character
31310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31317 is considered in sorting.
31320 \begin_layout Standard
31321 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31324 \begin_inset space ~
31329 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31330 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31332 For the example given, you can insert
31336 in this field for the
31337 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31344 will be located before
31345 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31351 \begin_layout Standard
31352 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31367 \begin_layout Subsection
31368 Nomenclature Options
31369 \begin_inset Index idx
31372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31373 Nomenclature ! Options
31381 \begin_layout Standard
31386 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31387 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31390 \begin_layout Description
31391 refeq Appends the phrase
31392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31407 to every nomenclature entry, where
31413 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31416 \begin_layout Description
31417 refpage Appends the phrase
31418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31433 to every nomenclature entry, where
31439 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31442 \begin_layout Description
31443 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31446 \begin_layout Standard
31447 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31448 class options list in the
31450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31454 In this document the options
31461 \begin_layout Standard
31462 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31468 \begin_layout Standard
31469 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31470 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31475 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31478 \begin_layout Description
31488 \begin_layout Description
31491 nomrefpage Like the
31498 \begin_layout Description
31501 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31510 \begin_layout Description
31514 \begin_inset space ~
31520 \begin_inset space ~
31525 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31528 \begin_layout Standard
31530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31537 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31538 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31550 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31553 \begin_inset Newline newline
31560 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31565 \begin_inset Newline newline
31569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31584 by their translation.
31587 \begin_layout Subsection
31588 Printing the Nomenclature
31589 \begin_inset Index idx
31592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 Nomenclature ! Printing
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31602 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31605 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31621 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31622 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31623 You can choose between these settings:
31626 \begin_layout Description
31627 Default a space of 1
31628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31634 \begin_layout Description
31636 \begin_inset space ~
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31643 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31646 \begin_layout Description
31647 Custom custom space
31650 \begin_layout Standard
31651 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31660 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31668 For example, in order to change the name to
31672 , add the following line to the preamble:
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31683 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31686 \begin_layout Subsection
31687 Nomenclature Program
31688 \begin_inset Index idx
31691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31692 Nomenclature ! Program
31698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31700 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31713 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31714 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31716 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31721 by adding options, see section
31722 \begin_inset space ~
31726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31728 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31733 The available options are listed and explained in
31734 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31736 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31744 \begin_layout Section
31746 \begin_inset Index idx
31749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31756 \begin_inset Index idx
31759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31760 Document ! Branches
31766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31768 name "sec:Branches"
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31777 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31778 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31779 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31783 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31784 allows you to put text into branches.
31785 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31786 To create a branch, either select the menu
31788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31789 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31792 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31794 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31801 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31802 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31803 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31804 and whether the name of the branch should
31805 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31806 (see below for an example).
31807 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31808 to the name of the other) and to add
31809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31821 \begin_inset space ~
31824 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31825 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31828 \begin_layout Standard
31829 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31830 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31835 where you can choose a branch.
31836 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31840 \begin_layout Standard
31841 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31842 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31846 \begin_inset Branch Question
31850 \begin_layout Standard
31851 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31859 \begin_layout Standard
31860 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31864 \begin_layout Standard
31865 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31873 \begin_layout Standard
31880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31884 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31885 Consider for example a file
31886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31893 which has the above branches.
31895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31902 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31926 branch were inactive,
31927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31942 branch was active, likewise
31943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31958 branch was active, and
31959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31962 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31966 if both branches were active.
31967 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31968 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
31972 \begin_layout Standard
31974 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
31975 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
31976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31983 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
31989 \begin_inset Branch Question
31993 \begin_layout Standard
31995 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
31996 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32004 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32005 To control whether a particular inset is
32006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32013 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32020 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32026 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32031 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32037 \begin_layout Standard
32038 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32039 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32040 definitions for each branch.
32041 For example you can define for the question branch
32045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32046 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32047 -syntax, see section
32048 \begin_inset space ~
32052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32054 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32066 \begin_layout Standard
32076 \begin_layout Standard
32086 \begin_layout Standard
32087 and for the answer branch
32090 \begin_layout Standard
32100 \begin_layout Standard
32110 \begin_layout Standard
32111 \begin_inset Branch Question
32115 \begin_layout Standard
32119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32147 \begin_layout Standard
32148 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32152 \begin_layout Standard
32156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32184 \begin_layout Standard
32185 Now it is possible to use the
32189 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32196 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32199 commands to obtain conditional output.
32200 Here is an example formula where only the
32207 \begin_inset Formula
32209 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32218 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32226 \begin_layout Standard
32227 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32233 \begin_inset space \space{}
32236 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32238 For this advanced usage, see the
32244 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32249 \begin_layout Section
32251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32253 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32258 \begin_inset Index idx
32261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32270 \begin_layout Standard
32273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32274 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32277 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32279 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32285 \begin_inset Index idx
32288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32290 -packages ! hyperref
32295 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32296 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32297 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32298 part of the document.
32302 \begin_layout Standard
32303 The header information in the dialog tab
32307 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32308 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32309 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32310 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32314 \begin_inset space ~
32318 \begin_inset space ~
32323 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32324 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32325 and author entries.
32329 \begin_inset space ~
32333 \begin_inset space ~
32337 \begin_inset space ~
32342 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32345 \begin_layout Standard
32346 You can specify in the dialog tab
32350 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32355 \begin_inset space ~
32359 \begin_inset space ~
32363 \begin_inset space ~
32368 option allows long links to be split;
32371 \begin_inset space ~
32375 \begin_inset space ~
32379 \begin_inset space ~
32387 \begin_inset space ~
32392 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32395 \begin_inset space ~
32400 colors the different links.
32401 The default colors are:
32404 \begin_layout Labeling
32405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32410 for hyperlinks and URLs
32413 \begin_layout Labeling
32414 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32422 \begin_layout Labeling
32423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32431 \begin_layout Standard
32432 but you can change these in the field
32437 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32443 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32451 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32452 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32453 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32456 \begin_layout Standard
32461 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32462 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32463 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32473 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32474 when opening the PDF.
32476 \begin_inset space ~
32479 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32480 \begin_inset space ~
32483 1 will only display the sections.
32486 \begin_layout Standard
32487 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32488 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32494 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32495 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32505 \begin_layout Section
32507 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32511 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32518 \begin_layout Subsection
32521 \begin_inset Index idx
32524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32534 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32541 \begin_layout Standard
32542 As \SpecialChar LyX
32543 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32544 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32545 commands and constructs,
32548 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32549 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32550 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32551 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32552 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32553 cannot support all packages and
32557 \begin_layout Standard
32558 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32559 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32560 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32564 Code box is created by the menu
32566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32568 \begin_inset space ~
32573 or by the toolbar button
32586 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32594 \begin_layout Standard
32595 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32597 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32599 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32604 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32609 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32616 , you can write the command part
32622 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32623 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32627 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32628 Code box behind the word.
32629 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32630 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32634 \begin_layout Standard
32635 \begin_inset Graphics
32636 filename clipart/ERT.png
32644 \begin_layout Standard
32648 \begin_layout Standard
32649 This is a line with a
32653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32676 \begin_layout Standard
32677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32685 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32686 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32687 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32688 know that the command is finished.
32696 \begin_layout Subsection
32697 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32699 \begin_inset Argument 1
32702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32703 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32710 \begin_inset Index idx
32713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32723 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32731 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32732 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32733 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32734 uses in the background.
32735 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32736 is based on commands, you can
32737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32745 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32746 any time if you know the right commands.
32747 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32748 is the end of the day.
32749 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32750 all caption labels bold.
32751 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32753 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32757 \begin_layout Standard
32758 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32760 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32762 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32765 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32775 \begin_layout Standard
32776 As result you find that the package
32781 \begin_inset Index idx
32784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32786 -packages ! caption
32792 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32794 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32797 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32801 \begin_inset space ~
32809 \begin_layout Standard
32814 usepackage[options]{package name}
32817 \begin_layout Standard
32818 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32819 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32820 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32821 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32824 \begin_layout Standard
32825 In your case the package name is
32830 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32835 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32836 So you add the command
32839 \begin_layout Standard
32844 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32847 \begin_layout Standard
32848 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32853 For more commands provided by the
32857 package, have a look at its documentation,
32858 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32873 \begin_layout Standard
32874 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32876 For example if you use a
32880 class, you don't need the package
32884 , you can instead write
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32892 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32897 \begin_layout Standard
32898 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32899 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32900 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32907 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32910 \begin_layout Standard
32911 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32912 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32914 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32915 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32916 Code box as described in the previous
32920 \begin_layout Standard
32921 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32922 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32925 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32927 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32935 \begin_layout Standard
32936 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32942 \begin_layout Standard
32946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32956 \begin_inset Note Note
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32960 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32968 \begin_layout Left Header
32969 \begin_inset Argument 1
32972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32992 \begin_inset Note Note
32995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32996 defines the header line as described below
33004 \begin_layout Center Header
33005 \begin_inset Argument 1
33008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 \begin_layout Right Header
33018 \begin_inset Argument 1
33021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33042 \begin_layout Left Footer
33043 \begin_inset Argument 1
33046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33067 \begin_layout Center Footer
33068 \begin_inset Argument 1
33071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33083 \begin_inset Newline newline
33087 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33093 \begin_layout Right Footer
33094 \begin_inset Argument 1
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33119 \begin_layout Section
33120 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33123 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33128 \begin_inset Index idx
33131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33132 Document ! Header/Footer line
33138 \begin_inset Index idx
33141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33150 \begin_layout Standard
33151 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33155 \begin_inset space ~
33166 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33172 \begin_inset space ~
33178 As a second step add in the menu
33180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33181 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33190 Custom Header/Footerlines
33193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33197 This module offers the following 6
33198 \begin_inset space ~
33204 \begin_layout Description
33206 \begin_inset space ~
33210 \begin_inset space ~
33214 \begin_inset space ~
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33228 \begin_layout Description
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33234 \begin_inset space ~
33238 \begin_inset space ~
33242 \begin_inset space ~
33246 \begin_inset space ~
33252 \begin_layout Standard
33253 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33254 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33257 \begin_layout Standard
33258 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33259 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33261 \begin_inset space ~
33265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33267 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33271 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33274 \begin_layout Standard
33275 \begin_inset Float figure
33281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33284 \begin_inset Tabular
33285 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33286 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33287 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33288 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33289 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33309 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33320 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33338 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33353 The normal text on the page goes here.
33354 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33356 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33357 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33362 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33371 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33400 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33429 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33452 name "fig:Page-layout"
33456 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33469 \begin_layout Standard
33470 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33478 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33487 is set to “Default”.
33488 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33497 \begin_layout Subsection
33501 \begin_layout Standard
33502 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33503 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33504 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33505 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33507 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33509 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33512 \begin_layout Standard
33513 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33514 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33520 \begin_inset space ~
33528 \begin_layout Description
33531 thepage prints the current page number
33534 \begin_layout Description
33537 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33540 \begin_layout Description
33543 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33546 \begin_layout Description
33549 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33550 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33557 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33560 because it usually goes in a left header.
33563 \begin_layout Description
33566 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33567 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33569 It is normally used in the right header.
33572 \begin_layout Subsection
33573 Default header/footer
33576 \begin_layout Standard
33577 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33578 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33579 footer has the page number.
33580 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33581 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33582 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33585 \begin_inset space ~
33593 \begin_layout Subsection
33597 \begin_layout Standard
33598 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33599 Some pages are different.
33600 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33601 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33602 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33603 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33604 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33607 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33608 Header and footer decoration line
33611 \begin_layout Standard
33612 By default, you get a 0.4
33613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33616 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33617 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33629 in the following way:
33632 \begin_layout Standard
33639 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33642 \begin_layout Standard
33643 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33656 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33666 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33667 \begin_inset space ~
33671 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33682 Several header/footer lines
33685 \begin_layout Standard
33686 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33687 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33688 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33690 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33706 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33708 \begin_inset space ~
33716 \begin_layout Standard
33723 headheight}{height}
33726 \begin_layout Standard
33731 is a size in standard units (e.
33732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33736 \begin_inset space \space{}
33744 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33745 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33746 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33747 logfile with the menu
33749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33751 \begin_inset space ~
33759 \begin_inset space ~
33764 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33769 \begin_inset Index idx
33772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33774 -packages ! fancyhdr
33780 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33781 for your header/footer.
33784 \begin_layout Subsection
33788 \begin_layout Standard
33789 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33790 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33791 This example consists of the following definition:
33794 \begin_layout Description
33796 \begin_inset space ~
33805 , empty optional argument
33808 \begin_layout Description
33810 \begin_inset space ~
33813 Header empty, empty optional argument
33816 \begin_layout Description
33818 \begin_inset space ~
33827 in the optional argument
33830 \begin_layout Description
33832 \begin_inset space ~
33841 in the optional argument
33844 \begin_layout Description
33846 \begin_inset space ~
33859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33863 \begin_inset Newline newline
33867 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33874 in the optional argument
33877 \begin_layout Description
33879 \begin_inset space ~
33888 , empty optional argument
33891 \begin_layout Description
33894 headrulewidth set to 2
33895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33901 \begin_layout Standard
33902 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33903 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33909 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33919 \begin_layout Standard
33920 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33926 \begin_layout Standard
33930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33934 pagestyle{headings}
33940 \begin_inset Note Note
33943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33944 switches back to page style with the default headings
33952 \begin_layout Section
33953 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33956 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33961 \begin_inset Index idx
33964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33971 \begin_inset Index idx
33974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 \begin_layout Standard
33985 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33986 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33987 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33990 \begin_layout Subsection
33994 \begin_layout Standard
33995 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34001 \begin_inset Index idx
34004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34006 -packages ! preview-latex
34011 (on some systems named simply
34016 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34018 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34025 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34027 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34035 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34036 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34037 -package are automatically
34038 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34042 \begin_layout Subsection
34046 \begin_layout Standard
34047 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34048 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34050 activate the option
34053 \begin_inset space ~
34060 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34070 \begin_inset space ~
34073 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34080 \begin_inset space ~
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34098 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34101 \begin_layout Standard
34102 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34115 \begin_inset space ~
34123 \begin_layout Standard
34124 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34125 and when you finish
34129 \begin_layout Standard
34130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34138 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34139 generated by activating the option
34142 \begin_inset space ~
34148 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34156 \begin_layout Subsection
34157 Selected document parts
34160 \begin_layout Standard
34161 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34162 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34163 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34164 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34166 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34172 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34173 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34174 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34177 \begin_layout Standard
34178 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34185 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34197 is explained in section
34199 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34204 \begin_inset space ~
34214 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34215 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34216 the final rotated boxes,
34217 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34218 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34220 Here is the result:
34223 \begin_layout Standard
34224 \begin_inset Preview
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34235 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34241 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34251 height_special "totalheight"
34256 backgroundcolor "none"
34259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34284 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34290 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34313 Previewing works also for colors.
34314 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 is explained in section
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34354 \begin_inset Preview
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34379 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34384 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34403 \begin_layout Standard
34404 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34410 \begin_layout Standard
34411 If \SpecialChar LyX
34412 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34413 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34414 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34415 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34416 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34417 the \SpecialChar TeX
34419 If \SpecialChar LyX
34420 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34421 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34423 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34424 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34425 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34428 \begin_layout Subsection
34433 \begin_layout Standard
34434 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34435 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34438 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34440 \begin_inset space ~
34445 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34447 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34449 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34450 's main window, then only this selection
34451 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34452 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34453 the source view window.
34458 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34459 ; but note that if you have
34460 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34462 not just the one which is open at the time.
34465 \begin_layout Section
34466 Advanced Find and Replace
34467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34469 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34474 \begin_inset Index idx
34477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 \begin_inset Index idx
34487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34496 \begin_layout Subsection
34500 \begin_layout Standard
34501 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34502 allows for searching of complex,
34503 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34505 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34506 The key-features are:
34509 \begin_layout Itemize
34510 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34511 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34512 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34516 \begin_layout Itemize
34517 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34518 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34519 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34520 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34523 \begin_layout Itemize
34524 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34525 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34526 outside of mathematics environments
34529 \begin_layout Itemize
34530 Search may be widened to a specific
34535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34539 \begin_inset space ~
34542 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34543 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34550 \begin_layout Itemize
34551 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34552 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34557 \begin_inset space ~
34560 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34563 \begin_layout Subsection
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34568 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34583 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34586 ) or the toolbar button
34589 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34595 Advanced Find and Replace
34600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34604 \begin_layout Standard
34610 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34619 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34622 arg "paragraph-break"
34626 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34627 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34631 arg "paragraph-break"
34634 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34638 searches backwards.
34641 \begin_layout Standard
34645 \begin_inset space ~
34650 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34659 \begin_inset space ~
34664 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34668 Searching for mathematics
34671 \begin_layout Standard
34672 Mathematical formulas, such as
34673 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34676 or something more complex like
34677 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34680 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34685 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34686 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34687 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34688 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34698 \begin_layout Standard
34699 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34700 This is done by switching to the
34704 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34709 This way, entering in the
34716 \begin_layout Itemize
34717 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34718 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34721 \begin_layout Itemize
34722 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34723 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34726 \begin_layout Itemize
34727 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34728 of it only within section headings.
34729 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34730 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34734 \begin_layout Itemize
34735 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34736 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34739 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34743 \begin_layout Standard
34744 The entries made in the
34748 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34751 \begin_inset space ~
34757 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34761 button or alternatively press
34764 arg "paragraph-break"
34771 while the cursor is in the
34774 \begin_inset space ~
34782 \begin_layout Standard
34783 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34785 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34789 \begin_layout Itemize
34790 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34791 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34799 with its typewriter version
34800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34814 \begin_layout Itemize
34815 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34821 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34833 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34840 (you may want to enable the
34843 \begin_inset space ~
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34856 options and disable the
34864 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34872 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34873 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34877 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34880 , or occurrences of
34881 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34885 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34891 \begin_layout Subsection
34895 \begin_layout Standard
34896 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34901 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34903 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34905 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34915 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34921 This is done with the context menu
34923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34924 Insert Regular Expression
34926 while the cursor is in the
34931 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34932 expression matching rules
34936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34937 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34944 \begin_inset space ~
34947 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34948 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34954 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34955 same text in the document.
34956 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34957 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34960 \begin_layout Enumerate
34961 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34966 editor the fraction
34967 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34971 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34974 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34975 fractions with the given denominator.
34978 \begin_layout Enumerate
34979 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34991 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34996 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34997 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34998 Also, by inserting a
34999 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35002 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35003 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35006 \begin_layout Standard
35007 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35008 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35009 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35012 , and referring back to them through
35013 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35017 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35021 For example, try searching with the regexp
35022 \begin_inset Newline newline
35025 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35028 \begin_inset Newline newline
35031 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35034 \begin_layout Standard
35035 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35039 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35047 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35048 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35049 sub-expressions is absolute.
35051 \begin_inset space ~
35055 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35058 always refers to the first occurrence of
35059 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35062 in all entered regexps.
35070 \begin_layout Section
35072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35074 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35079 \begin_inset Index idx
35082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35091 \begin_layout Standard
35093 has a built-in spell checker.
35096 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35103 key or the toolbar button
35106 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35109 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35110 beginning of the currently selected text.
35111 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35112 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35113 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35114 scrolled so that it is visible.
35115 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35116 n, if any could be found.
35117 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35121 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35122 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35125 \begin_layout Standard
35126 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35133 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35134 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35136 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35137 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35140 \begin_inset space ~
35148 arg "dialog-show character"
35151 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35153 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35156 \begin_layout Standard
35157 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35158 can be downloaded from here:
35159 \begin_inset Newline newline
35163 \begin_inset Flex URL
35166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35168 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35174 \begin_inset Newline newline
35178 \begin_inset space ~
35181 files for each language.
35182 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35186 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35187 's installation subfolder
35195 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35197 \begin_inset Newline newline
35200 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35201 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35202 but in most cases these are
35218 is the language code.
35221 \begin_layout Subsection
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35228 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35229 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35231 \begin_inset space ~
35234 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35237 you can set the following things:
35240 \begin_layout Description
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35245 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35246 should use for spell checking.
35247 Depending on your platform,
35261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35263 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35281 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35284 \begin_layout Description
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35289 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35290 will always use the given language
35291 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35294 \begin_layout Description
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35299 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35305 \begin_inset space \space{}
35309 This should normally not be needed.
35312 \begin_layout Description
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35318 \begin_inset space ~
35321 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35333 \begin_layout Description
35335 \begin_inset space ~
35338 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35339 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35340 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35341 appear in a context menu.
35342 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35346 \begin_layout Description
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35352 \begin_inset space ~
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35359 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35363 \begin_layout Section
35365 \begin_inset Index idx
35368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35377 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35384 \begin_layout Standard
35386 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35387 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35399 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35409 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35411 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35412 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35413 which are available for many languages.
35416 \begin_layout Standard
35417 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35418 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35422 \begin_layout Subsection
35423 Setting up the thesaurus
35426 \begin_layout Standard
35435 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35439 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35444 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35450 \begin_inset space ~
35458 For instance, the US English files are named:
35461 \begin_layout Itemize
35465 \begin_layout Itemize
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35478 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35479 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35482 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35483 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35484 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35486 \begin_inset space ~
35491 ) to the path where they are installed.
35495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35496 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35497 ies, typical locations are
35503 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35507 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35511 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35514 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35520 LibreOffice-<Version>
35527 On the Mac, the default location is
35529 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35530 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35531 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35532 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35533 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35534 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35542 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35543 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35544 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35548 \begin_layout Standard
35549 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35550 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35554 \begin_layout Itemize
35555 \begin_inset Flex URL
35558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35560 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35570 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35573 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35574 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35576 \begin_inset space ~
35581 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35583 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35584 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35588 \begin_layout Standard
35589 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35591 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35594 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35600 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35603 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35604 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35612 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35613 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35614 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35616 \begin_inset space ~
35621 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35624 \begin_layout Subsection
35625 Using the thesaurus
35628 \begin_layout Standard
35629 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35631 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35634 or the toolbar button
35637 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35640 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35642 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35644 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35645 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35646 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35655 ), related terms (such as
35658 \begin_inset space ~
35667 ), compounds (such as
35670 \begin_inset space ~
35679 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35688 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35691 \begin_layout Standard
35692 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35693 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35697 \begin_layout Standard
35698 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35699 the dictionary, such as the above
35703 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35708 \begin_inset space \space{}
35711 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35712 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35713 For example, looking up the word form
35717 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35722 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35727 \begin_inset space \space{}
35738 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35739 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35740 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35743 \begin_layout Section
35745 \begin_inset Index idx
35748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35755 \begin_inset Index idx
35758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35759 Document ! Change Tracking
35765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35767 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35774 \begin_layout Standard
35775 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35776 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35777 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35778 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35782 \begin_inset space ~
35785 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35795 \begin_layout Standard
35796 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35810 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35811 You can change the color in
35813 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35814 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35816 \begin_inset space ~
35820 \begin_inset space ~
35825 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35831 \begin_inset Index idx
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35835 Color ! Change tracking
35840 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35841 's status bar when the
35842 cursor is in changed text.
35843 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35846 arg "changes-merge"
35852 \begin_layout Standard
35853 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35855 \begin_inset Index idx
35858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35867 \begin_layout Standard
35868 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35874 \begin_layout Standard
35875 \begin_inset Graphics
35876 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35884 \begin_layout Standard
35885 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35891 \begin_layout Standard
35892 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35896 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35902 \begin_layout Standard
35903 \begin_inset Tabular
35904 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35905 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35906 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35907 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35917 arg "changes-track"
35925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35936 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35956 arg "changes-output"
35964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35975 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35981 \begin_inset space ~
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36015 Jumps to the next change
36021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36030 arg "change-accept"
36038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36046 \begin_inset space ~
36049 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36051 \begin_inset space ~
36060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36069 arg "change-reject"
36077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36088 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36108 arg "changes-merge"
36116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36127 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36129 \begin_inset space ~
36138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36147 arg "all-changes-accept"
36155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36163 \begin_inset space ~
36166 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36168 \begin_inset space ~
36172 \begin_inset space ~
36181 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36190 arg "all-changes-reject"
36198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36209 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36215 \begin_inset space ~
36224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36248 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36282 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36301 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36307 \begin_layout Standard
36308 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36328 \begin_layout Standard
36329 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36330 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36331 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36332 the next change after the current cursor position.
36333 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36334 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36335 step to the next change.
36336 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36339 \begin_layout Standard
36340 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36341 to describe a change.
36344 \begin_layout Standard
36345 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36351 \begin_inset Index idx
36354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36356 -packages ! dvipost
36362 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36371 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36375 \begin_layout Section
36376 Comparison of Documents
36377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36379 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36384 \begin_inset Index idx
36387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36388 Comparison of documents
36396 \begin_layout Standard
36397 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36400 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36404 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36405 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36407 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36409 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36442 \begin_inset space ~
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36455 enables the change tracking option
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36462 \begin_inset space ~
36466 \begin_inset space ~
36471 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36474 \begin_layout Section
36475 International Support
36476 \begin_inset Index idx
36479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36480 International support
36488 \begin_layout Standard
36489 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36490 with any language you want.
36491 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36492 up \SpecialChar LyX
36494 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36496 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36504 \begin_layout Standard
36505 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36506 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36520 \begin_layout Subsection
36522 \begin_inset Index idx
36525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36532 \begin_inset Index idx
36535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36536 Document ! Settings
36542 \begin_inset Index idx
36545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36546 Document ! Language
36554 \begin_layout Standard
36557 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36558 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36561 dialog lets you set
36563 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36568 \begin_layout Standard
36573 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36578 \begin_inset space ~
36583 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36584 For details about the different encoding options see section
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36591 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36598 \begin_layout Subsection
36599 Keyboard mapping configuration
36600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36602 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36609 \begin_layout Standard
36610 If you have for example a U.
36611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36614 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36615 can use an alternate keymap.
36616 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36621 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36622 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36623 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36626 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36633 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36638 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36639 which one you want to use.
36642 \begin_layout Standard
36643 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36644 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36645 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36649 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36650 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36651 one to support the characters you want.
36652 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36659 \begin_layout Chapter
36662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36664 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36671 \begin_layout Standard
36672 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36673 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36674 topic inside the user's guide.
36677 \begin_layout Section
36679 \begin_inset Index idx
36682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36691 \begin_layout Standard
36696 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36699 \begin_layout Subsection
36703 \begin_layout Standard
36704 Creates a new document.
36707 \begin_layout Subsection
36711 \begin_layout Standard
36712 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36713 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36714 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36717 \begin_layout Subsection
36721 \begin_layout Standard
36725 \begin_layout Subsection
36729 \begin_layout Standard
36730 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36731 Click there on a file to open it.
36734 \begin_layout Subsection
36738 \begin_layout Standard
36739 Closes the current document.
36742 \begin_layout Subsection
36746 \begin_layout Standard
36747 Closes all opened documents.
36750 \begin_layout Subsection
36754 \begin_layout Standard
36755 Saves the actual document.
36758 \begin_layout Subsection
36762 \begin_layout Standard
36763 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36766 \begin_layout Subsection
36770 \begin_layout Standard
36771 Saves all opened documents.
36774 \begin_layout Subsection
36778 \begin_layout Standard
36779 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36782 \begin_layout Subsection
36786 \begin_layout Standard
36787 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36788 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36789 It is described in the section
36791 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36796 Additional Features
36801 \begin_layout Subsection
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36807 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36809 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36810 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36814 \begin_layout Standard
36815 When using the menu entry
36818 \begin_inset space ~
36823 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36831 \begin_inset space ~
36835 \begin_inset space ~
36840 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36841 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36844 \begin_layout Subsection
36846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36848 name "subsec:Export"
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36856 You can export your document to various file formats.
36857 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36859 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36860 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36861 during its configuration.
36864 \begin_layout Standard
36865 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36867 \begin_inset space ~
36871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36873 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36880 \begin_layout Description
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36889 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36894 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36895 \begin_inset Newline newline
36898 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36899 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36903 \begin_layout Description
36904 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36910 \begin_layout Description
36912 \begin_inset space ~
36915 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36921 \begin_layout Description
36922 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36923 's native DVI-format.
36924 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36925 files paths or file names in your document.
36927 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36934 \begin_layout Description
36935 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36936 in files paths or file names
36939 \begin_layout Description
36941 \begin_inset space ~
36948 ) DVI-format using the program
36950 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36953 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36957 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36965 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36973 \begin_layout Description
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36978 (cropped) the same as
36982 but with cropped page margins.
36985 \begin_layout Description
36987 \begin_inset space ~
36990 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36994 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36999 \begin_layout Description
37003 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37011 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37019 \begin_layout Description
37021 \begin_inset space ~
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37028 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37032 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37040 \begin_layout Description
37044 \begin_inset space ~
37053 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37054 source that is compilable with the program
37056 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37060 \begin_layout Description
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37069 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37070 source, additionally all images used in the document
37071 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37075 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37078 \begin_layout Description
37082 \begin_inset space ~
37087 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37088 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37089 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37097 \begin_layout Description
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37110 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37111 source that is compilable with the program
37117 \begin_layout Description
37119 \begin_inset space ~
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37130 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37131 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37137 \begin_layout Description
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37142 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37143 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37149 \begin_inset space \space{}
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37173 represent the version number)
37176 \begin_layout Description
37178 \begin_inset space ~
37182 \begin_inset space ~
37185 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37186 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37187 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37191 \begin_layout Description
37192 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37193 's internal XHTML engine
37196 \begin_layout Description
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37206 \begin_inset space ~
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37213 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37218 For the conversion the program
37227 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37230 \begin_layout Description
37231 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37236 \begin_layout Description
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37241 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37243 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37246 For the conversion the program
37255 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37258 \begin_layout Description
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37263 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37264 For the conversion the program
37273 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37276 \begin_layout Description
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37281 (cropped) the same as
37284 \begin_inset space ~
37289 but with cropped page margins
37292 \begin_layout Description
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37301 PDF-format using the program
37305 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37308 \begin_layout Description
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37329 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37334 \begin_inset space \space{}
37337 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37341 \begin_layout Description
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37350 PDF-format using the program
37352 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37355 , produces PDF-files directly
37358 \begin_layout Description
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37367 PDF-format using the program
37371 , produces PDF-files directly
37374 \begin_layout Description
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37383 PDF-format using the program
37387 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37390 \begin_layout Description
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37399 PDF-format using the program
37404 , produces PDF-files directly
37407 \begin_layout Description
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_layout Description
37423 \begin_inset space ~
37427 \begin_inset space ~
37432 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37433 and then exported as text using the program
37438 \begin_layout Description
37443 PostScript format using the program
37451 options see section
37452 \begin_inset space ~
37456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37458 reference "subsec:General-output"
37465 \begin_layout Description
37466 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37467 source and also code in the statistical programming
37481 it is possible to use
37485 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37489 \begin_layout Standard
37490 If one of the menu entries
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37506 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37508 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37510 \begin_inset space ~
37514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37516 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37521 \begin_inset Index idx
37524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37525 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37534 \begin_layout Subsection
37538 \begin_layout Standard
37539 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37540 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37543 \begin_inset space ~
37547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37549 reference "sec:Paths"
37554 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37563 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37564 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37565 's preferences as described in section
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37572 reference "subsec:Converters"
37579 \begin_layout Subsection
37580 New and Close Window
37583 \begin_layout Standard
37584 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37588 \begin_layout Subsection
37592 \begin_layout Standard
37593 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37596 \begin_layout Section
37598 \begin_inset Index idx
37601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37610 \begin_layout Subsection
37614 \begin_layout Standard
37615 Described in section
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37622 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37629 \begin_layout Subsection
37630 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37633 \begin_layout Standard
37634 Described in section
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37641 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37648 \begin_layout Subsection
37652 \begin_layout Standard
37653 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37654 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37657 \begin_layout Subsection
37661 \begin_layout Standard
37662 Selects the whole document.
37665 \begin_layout Subsection
37666 Find & Replace (Quick)
37669 \begin_layout Standard
37670 Described in section
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37677 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37684 \begin_layout Subsection
37685 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37688 \begin_layout Standard
37689 Described in section
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37696 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37703 \begin_layout Subsection
37704 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37707 \begin_layout Standard
37708 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37712 \begin_layout Subsection
37716 \begin_layout Standard
37717 Described in section
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37724 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37731 \begin_layout Subsection
37733 \begin_inset Index idx
37736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37737 Paragraph ! Settings
37745 \begin_layout Standard
37746 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37747 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37752 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37753 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37760 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37762 \begin_inset space ~
37770 \begin_layout Subsection
37771 Table and Rows & Columns
37774 \begin_layout Standard
37775 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37776 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37777 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37780 \begin_layout Subsection
37784 \begin_layout Standard
37785 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37786 It will dissolve this inset.
37787 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37791 \begin_layout Subsection
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37797 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37800 \begin_layout Subsection
37801 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37804 \begin_layout Standard
37805 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37807 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37814 reference "sec:Nesting"
37819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37821 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37828 \begin_layout Subsection
37831 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37834 \begin_layout Standard
37835 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37836 nts of the same type.
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37844 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37848 for an explanation.
37851 \begin_layout Section
37853 \begin_inset Index idx
37856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37865 \begin_layout Standard
37866 At the bottom of the
37870 menu the opened documents are listed.
37873 \begin_layout Subsection
37874 Open/Close all Insets
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37878 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37881 \begin_layout Subsection
37882 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37889 \begin_layout Standard
37890 Math macros are described in the
37897 \begin_layout Subsection
37901 \begin_layout Standard
37902 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37903 \begin_inset space ~
37907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37909 reference "sec:Navigating"
37914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37916 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37923 \begin_layout Subsection
37927 \begin_layout Standard
37928 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37930 \begin_inset space ~
37934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37936 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37943 \begin_layout Subsection
37947 \begin_layout Standard
37948 Opens a window showing console messages.
37949 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37954 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37955 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37956 is processing the document.
37959 \begin_layout Subsection
37961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37963 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37968 \begin_inset Index idx
37971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37980 \begin_layout Standard
37981 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37982 All toolbars and the
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37990 can be turned on and off.
37995 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38007 \begin_inset space ~
38019 \begin_inset space ~
38024 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38028 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38035 \begin_layout Standard
38040 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38044 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38045 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38046 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38047 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38048 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38051 \begin_layout Standard
38053 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38060 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38067 \begin_layout Subsection
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38091 \begin_inset space ~
38095 \begin_inset space ~
38100 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38101 's main window vertically while
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset space ~
38120 \begin_inset space ~
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38129 will split it horizontally.
38130 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38131 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38132 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38133 three or more documents at the same time.
38134 To close a split view, use the menu
38137 \begin_inset space ~
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38149 \begin_layout Subsection
38153 \begin_layout Standard
38154 Closes a split view.
38157 \begin_layout Subsection
38161 \begin_layout Standard
38162 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38163 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38164 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38165 's main window fullscreen.
38166 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38167 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38170 \begin_layout Section
38172 \begin_inset Index idx
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 \begin_layout Subsection
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38190 \begin_inset space ~
38194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38196 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38207 \begin_layout Subsection
38209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38211 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 Here you can insert the following characters:
38222 \begin_layout Description
38227 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38230 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38231 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38232 -packages you have installed.
38233 You can get a complete display by checking
38236 \begin_inset space ~
38242 \begin_inset Newline newline
38246 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38254 Not all characters will be visible in the
38258 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38259 dialog (see section
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38266 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38270 ) can display every character.
38278 \begin_layout Description
38279 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38283 \begin_layout Description
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset space ~
38292 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38299 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38306 \begin_layout Description
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38311 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38315 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38321 \begin_layout Description
38323 \begin_inset space ~
38326 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38330 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38336 \begin_layout Description
38338 \begin_inset space ~
38341 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38345 \begin_layout Description
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38350 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38354 \begin_layout Description
38356 \begin_inset space ~
38359 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38365 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38371 \begin_layout Description
38373 \begin_inset space ~
38376 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38380 \begin_layout Description
38382 \begin_inset space ~
38386 \begin_inset Index idx
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 \begin_inset Index idx
38399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38400 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38405 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38406 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38408 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38414 \begin_inset Index idx
38417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 \begin_inset Newline newline
38428 More information about this feature can be found in the
38434 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38440 \begin_layout Description
38441 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38443 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38444 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38448 \begin_layout Subsection
38452 \begin_layout Standard
38453 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38456 \begin_layout Description
38457 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38458 \begin_inset script superscript
38460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38469 \begin_layout Description
38470 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38471 \begin_inset script subscript
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38482 \begin_layout Description
38484 \begin_inset space ~
38487 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38488 \begin_inset space ~
38492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38494 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38501 \begin_layout Description
38503 \begin_inset space ~
38506 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38507 \begin_inset space ~
38511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38513 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38520 \begin_layout Description
38522 \begin_inset space ~
38525 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38526 \begin_inset space ~
38530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38532 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38539 \begin_layout Description
38541 \begin_inset space ~
38544 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38550 \begin_inset space \space{}
38553 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38554 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38563 To insert a fraction use the command
38568 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38572 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38581 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38588 \begin_layout Description
38590 \begin_inset space ~
38593 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38594 \begin_inset space ~
38598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38600 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38607 \begin_layout Description
38609 \begin_inset space ~
38612 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38613 \begin_inset space ~
38617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38619 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38626 \begin_layout Description
38628 \begin_inset space ~
38631 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38632 \begin_inset space ~
38636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38638 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38645 \begin_layout Description
38646 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38647 \begin_inset space ~
38651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38653 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38660 \begin_layout Description
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38665 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38666 \begin_inset space ~
38670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38672 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38679 \begin_layout Description
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38684 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38685 \begin_inset space ~
38689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38691 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38698 \begin_layout Description
38700 \begin_inset space ~
38704 \begin_inset space ~
38707 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38708 \begin_inset space ~
38712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38714 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38721 \begin_layout Description
38723 \begin_inset space ~
38726 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38727 as described in section
38728 \begin_inset space ~
38732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38734 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38741 \begin_layout Description
38743 \begin_inset space ~
38746 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38747 \begin_inset space ~
38751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38753 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38760 \begin_layout Description
38762 \begin_inset space ~
38765 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38766 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38774 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38781 \begin_layout Description
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38786 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38787 \begin_inset space ~
38791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38793 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38800 \begin_layout Description
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38806 \begin_inset space ~
38809 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38816 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38823 \begin_layout Subsection
38827 \begin_layout Standard
38828 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38832 \begin_inset space ~
38853 are described in section
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38860 reference "sec:toc"
38869 is described in section
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38876 reference "sec:Index"
38884 is described in section
38885 \begin_inset space ~
38889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38891 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38897 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38900 is described in section
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38907 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38914 \begin_layout Subsection
38918 \begin_layout Standard
38919 To insert floats, as described in section
38920 \begin_inset space ~
38924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38926 reference "sec:Floats"
38930 and in detail the chapter
38937 \begin_inset space ~
38945 \begin_layout Subsection
38949 \begin_layout Standard
38950 To insert notes, described in section
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38957 reference "sec:Notes"
38964 \begin_layout Subsection
38968 \begin_layout Standard
38969 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38971 Branches are described in section
38972 \begin_inset space ~
38976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38978 reference "sec:Branches"
38985 \begin_layout Subsection
38989 \begin_layout Standard
38990 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38991 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38993 An example is the document class
38994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39001 with three custom insets.
39004 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39008 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39014 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39017 \begin_layout Subsection
39019 \begin_inset Index idx
39022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39031 \begin_layout Standard
39032 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39034 For more information see chapter
39036 External Document Parts
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39045 \begin_layout Subsection
39047 \begin_inset Index idx
39050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 \begin_layout Standard
39060 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39061 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39068 \begin_inset space ~
39076 \begin_layout Subsection
39080 \begin_layout Standard
39085 dialog as described in section
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39092 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39099 \begin_layout Subsection
39103 \begin_layout Standard
39108 as described in section
39109 \begin_inset space ~
39113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39115 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39122 \begin_layout Subsection
39126 \begin_layout Standard
39131 as described in section
39132 \begin_inset space ~
39136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39138 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39145 \begin_layout Subsection
39147 \begin_inset Index idx
39150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 \begin_inset Index idx
39160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39169 \begin_layout Standard
39170 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39171 Floats are described in section
39172 \begin_inset space ~
39176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39178 reference "sec:Floats"
39182 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39184 Multi-page Captions
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39197 \begin_layout Subsection
39201 \begin_layout Standard
39202 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39203 \begin_inset space ~
39207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39209 reference "sec:Index"
39216 \begin_layout Subsection
39220 \begin_layout Standard
39221 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39222 \begin_inset space ~
39226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39228 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39235 \begin_layout Subsection
39239 \begin_layout Standard
39240 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39241 Tables are described in section
39242 \begin_inset space ~
39246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39248 reference "sec:Tables"
39252 and in detail in the chapter
39259 \begin_inset space ~
39267 \begin_layout Subsection
39271 \begin_layout Standard
39277 Graphics are described in section
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39284 reference "sec:Graphics"
39291 \begin_layout Subsection
39295 \begin_layout Standard
39296 Inserts a URL as described in section
39297 \begin_inset space ~
39301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39303 reference "subsec:URLs"
39310 \begin_layout Subsection
39314 \begin_layout Standard
39315 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39322 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39329 \begin_layout Subsection
39333 \begin_layout Standard
39334 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39341 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39348 \begin_layout Subsection
39352 \begin_layout Standard
39353 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39354 \begin_inset space ~
39358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39360 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39367 \begin_layout Subsection
39371 \begin_layout Standard
39372 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39373 title or caption of a float.
39374 Inserts a short title as described in section
39375 \begin_inset space ~
39379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39381 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39388 \begin_layout Subsection
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39394 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39395 Code box as described in section
39396 \begin_inset space ~
39400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39402 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39409 \begin_layout Subsection
39411 \begin_inset Index idx
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39423 \begin_layout Standard
39424 Inserts a program listings box.
39425 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39427 Program Code Listings
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_layout Subsection
39444 \begin_layout Standard
39445 Inserts the actual date.
39446 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39450 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39458 \begin_inset space ~
39466 \begin_layout Subsection
39470 \begin_layout Standard
39471 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39478 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39485 \begin_layout Section
39487 \begin_inset Index idx
39490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39499 \begin_layout Standard
39500 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39501 \begin_inset space ~
39504 of the current document.
39505 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39508 \begin_layout Subsection
39512 \begin_layout Standard
39513 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39514 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39515 to jump, for example, between section
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39520 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39524 2.5 and use the submenu
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39544 \begin_inset space ~
39548 \begin_inset space ~
39554 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39558 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39564 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39567 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39570 \begin_layout Standard
39571 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39575 \begin_inset space ~
39580 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39583 \begin_inset space ~
39588 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39591 \begin_layout Subsection
39592 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39595 \begin_layout Standard
39596 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39600 \begin_layout Subsection
39604 \begin_layout Standard
39605 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39606 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39607 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_inset space ~
39623 \begin_layout Subsection
39627 \begin_layout Standard
39628 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39631 The \SpecialChar LyX
39632 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39647 manual for a detailed description.
39650 \begin_layout Section
39652 \begin_inset Index idx
39655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 \begin_layout Subsection
39668 \begin_layout Standard
39669 Change Tracking is described in section
39670 \begin_inset space ~
39674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39676 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39683 \begin_layout Subsection
39691 \begin_layout Standard
39692 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39693 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39694 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39696 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39697 to the clipboard or update the view.
39698 \begin_inset Newline newline
39701 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39705 \begin_layout Standard
39708 Open Containing Directory
39710 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39711 's temporary folder for the document.
39712 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39713 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39714 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39715 For example some journals require to send the
39719 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39723 \begin_layout Subsection
39724 Start Appendix Here
39727 \begin_layout Standard
39728 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39729 as described in section
39730 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39736 reference "sec:Appendices"
39743 \begin_layout Subsection
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39751 \begin_layout Standard
39752 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39753 default output format for the document (menu
39755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39756 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39757 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39763 \begin_inset space ~
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39775 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39779 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39782 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39783 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39785 \begin_inset space ~
39788 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39793 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39795 \begin_inset space ~
39799 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39811 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39815 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39816 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39818 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39819 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39824 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39826 \begin_inset space ~
39829 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39839 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39844 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39845 when it is first configured.
39846 The default output format is
39849 \begin_inset space ~
39857 \begin_layout Subsection
39858 View (Other Formats)
39861 \begin_layout Standard
39862 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39863 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39864 actual document with an external program.
39865 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39866 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39867 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39869 All possible formats are listed in section
39870 \begin_inset space ~
39874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39876 reference "subsec:Export"
39881 You should at least see the menu entry
39886 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39888 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39896 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39901 \begin_inset Index idx
39904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39905 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39915 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39916 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39918 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39919 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39924 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39929 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39933 \begin_inset space ~
39937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39939 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39944 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39945 when it is first configured.
39948 \begin_layout Subsection
39950 \begin_inset space ~
39956 \begin_layout Standard
39957 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39958 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39961 \begin_layout Subsection
39962 Update (Other Formats)
39965 \begin_layout Standard
39966 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39967 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39970 \begin_layout Subsection
39971 View Master Document
39974 \begin_layout Standard
39975 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39996 manual for more information on this topic).
39997 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39998 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40002 \begin_inset space ~
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40011 generates the output of the whole book, while
40015 will just output the chapter alone.
40018 \begin_layout Standard
40019 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40020 in the document settings (menu
40022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40023 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40024 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40030 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40042 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40046 ) or in the preferences (menu
40048 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40049 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40054 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40059 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40061 \begin_inset space ~
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40077 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40084 \begin_layout Subsection
40085 Update Master Document
40088 \begin_layout Standard
40089 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40110 manual for more information on this topic).
40111 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40112 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40115 \begin_layout Standard
40116 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40117 in the document settings (menu
40119 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40120 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40121 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40127 \begin_inset space ~
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40139 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40143 ) or in the preferences (menu
40145 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40146 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40148 \begin_inset space ~
40151 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40153 \begin_inset space ~
40156 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40158 \begin_inset space ~
40162 \begin_inset space ~
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40174 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40181 \begin_layout Subsection
40183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40185 name "subsec:Compressed"
40192 \begin_layout Standard
40193 Un/compresses the current document.
40194 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40195 compression (see the
40197 Additional Features
40199 manual for details).
40202 \begin_layout Subsection
40206 \begin_layout Standard
40207 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40210 \begin_layout Subsection
40214 \begin_layout Standard
40215 The document settings are described in appendix
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40222 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40229 \begin_layout Section
40231 \begin_inset Index idx
40234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40243 \begin_layout Subsection
40247 \begin_layout Standard
40248 Spell checking is explained in section
40249 \begin_inset space ~
40253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40255 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40262 \begin_layout Subsection
40266 \begin_layout Standard
40267 The thesaurus is described in section
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40274 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40281 \begin_layout Subsection
40283 \begin_inset Index idx
40286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40293 \begin_inset Index idx
40296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40305 \begin_layout Standard
40306 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40307 the highlighted document part.
40310 \begin_layout Subsection
40316 \begin_inset Index idx
40319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40320 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40329 \begin_layout Standard
40330 Generates with the help of the program
40332 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40335 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40336 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40337 This feature is not available on Windows.
40340 \begin_layout Subsection
40346 \begin_inset Index idx
40349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40359 \begin_layout Standard
40360 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40365 \begin_inset space ~
40370 to see the full filename paths.
40373 \begin_layout Subsection
40375 \begin_inset Index idx
40378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40387 \begin_layout Standard
40388 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40389 files as described in section
40390 \begin_inset space ~
40394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40396 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40403 \begin_layout Subsection
40405 \begin_inset Index idx
40408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40421 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40439 \begin_inset Index idx
40442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40443 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40452 \begin_layout Standard
40453 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40454 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40455 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40456 -packages and programs it needs; see
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40464 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40471 \begin_layout Subsection
40475 \begin_layout Standard
40480 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40481 \begin_inset space ~
40485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40487 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40494 \begin_layout Section
40496 \begin_inset Index idx
40499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40508 \begin_layout Standard
40509 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40510 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40512 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40525 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40526 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40527 packages and classes found
40528 by \SpecialChar LyX
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40536 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40543 \begin_layout Standard
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40552 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40557 \begin_layout Section
40559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40561 name "sec:Toolbars"
40568 \begin_layout Standard
40569 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40576 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40583 \begin_layout Standard
40584 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40585 This is described in the
40587 Additional Features
40592 \begin_layout Subsection
40594 \begin_inset Index idx
40597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40606 \begin_layout Standard
40607 \begin_inset Graphics
40608 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40616 \begin_layout Standard
40617 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40624 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40641 \begin_inset Note Note
40644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40645 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40650 manual for more information.
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40659 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40665 \begin_layout Standard
40666 \begin_inset Tabular
40667 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40668 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40669 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40670 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40676 \begin_inset Graphics
40677 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 pull-down box for the environments
40704 \begin_layout Standard
40705 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40711 \begin_layout Standard
40713 \begin_inset Tabular
40714 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40715 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40716 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40717 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40741 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40801 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40817 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40831 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40847 arg "spelling-continuously"
40855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40859 Spellcheck continuously
40865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40888 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40948 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40978 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41008 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41024 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41064 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41078 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41106 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41121 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41149 Emphasize text, function of the
41151 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41156 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 Set text to noun style, function of the
41188 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41190 \begin_inset space ~
41193 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41211 arg "textstyle-apply"
41219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41223 Format text using the current settings in the
41225 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41230 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41263 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41311 arg "tabular-insert"
41319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41325 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41341 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41353 Toggle outline window on/off,
41355 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41398 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41410 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41423 \begin_layout Subsection
41425 \begin_inset Index idx
41428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41437 \begin_layout Standard
41438 \begin_inset Graphics
41439 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41447 \begin_layout Standard
41448 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41454 \begin_layout Standard
41455 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41459 \begin_layout Standard
41460 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41466 \begin_layout Standard
41467 \begin_inset Tabular
41468 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41469 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41470 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41471 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41508 arg "layout Enumerate"
41516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41535 arg "layout Itemize"
41543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41589 arg "layout Description"
41597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41607 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41616 arg "depth-increment"
41624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41630 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41636 \begin_inset space ~
41645 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41654 arg "depth-decrement"
41662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41674 \begin_inset space ~
41683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41692 arg "float-insert figure"
41700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41707 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41723 arg "float-insert table"
41731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41738 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41775 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41784 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41814 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41878 arg "nomencl-insert"
41886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41894 \begin_inset space ~
41903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41912 arg "footnote-insert"
41920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41942 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41958 \begin_inset space ~
41967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41991 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41993 \begin_inset space ~
42002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42085 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42087 \begin_inset space ~
42096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42105 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42120 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42136 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42151 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42171 arg "dialog-show character"
42179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42185 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42190 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42206 arg "layout-paragraph"
42214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42220 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42222 \begin_inset space ~
42231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42240 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42254 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42268 \begin_layout Subsection
42269 View/Update Toolbar
42270 \begin_inset Index idx
42273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 Toolbar ! View / Update
42282 \begin_layout Standard
42283 \begin_inset Graphics
42284 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42291 \begin_layout Standard
42292 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42298 \begin_layout Standard
42299 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42303 \begin_layout Standard
42304 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42311 \begin_inset Tabular
42312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42313 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42314 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42315 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 arg "buffer-update"
42363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 arg "master-buffer-view"
42393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42401 \begin_inset space ~
42410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42419 arg "master-buffer-update"
42427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42439 \begin_inset space ~
42448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42457 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42472 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42473 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42474 Synchronize with Output
42480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42504 View (Other Formats)
42510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42517 arg "update-others"
42525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42531 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42532 Update (Other Formats)
42545 \begin_layout Standard
42546 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42550 \begin_layout Subsection
42554 \begin_layout Standard
42555 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42556 \begin_inset space ~
42560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42562 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42566 , the table toolbar
42567 \begin_inset Index idx
42570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42584 manual and the math macro toolbar
42585 \begin_inset Index idx
42588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42601 \begin_layout Chapter
42602 The Document Settings
42603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42605 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42610 \begin_inset Index idx
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 Document ! Settings
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42631 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42632 is called with the menu
42634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42638 You can save your document settings as default with the
42640 Save as Document Defaults
42642 button in any dialog.
42643 This will create a template named
42647 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42648 when you create a new document without
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42657 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42658 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42661 \begin_layout Standard
42662 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42663 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42664 to find the one you are looking for.
42665 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42666 the submenus of the dialog.
42668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42672 \begin_inset space \space{}
42676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42683 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42684 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42685 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42688 \begin_layout Section
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42693 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42695 Document classes are described in section
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42702 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42710 \begin_layout Standard
42714 \begin_inset space ~
42719 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42724 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42725 as a layout for a document class.
42726 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42728 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42737 \begin_layout Standard
42738 Some classes use special class options by default.
42739 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42743 and you can decide to use them or not.
42744 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42745 recommended you leave them untouched.
42750 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42751 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42756 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42758 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42764 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42765 \begin_inset Newline newline
42770 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42773 \begin_inset Newline newline
42776 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42777 distribution, see section
42782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42784 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42797 \begin_layout Standard
42802 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42803 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42804 in the background if the child document
42805 is opened without its master.
42806 This way child documents are always compilable.
42807 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42814 \begin_inset space ~
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42823 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42834 \begin_inset Index idx
42837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42839 -packages ! prettyref
42845 \begin_inset Index idx
42848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42850 -packages ! refstyle
42855 for cross-references, see section
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42862 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42869 \begin_layout Section
42873 \begin_layout Standard
42874 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42875 Please refer to the section
42878 \begin_inset space ~
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42891 manual for details.
42894 \begin_layout Section
42898 \begin_layout Standard
42899 Modules are explained in section
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42906 reference "subsec:Modules"
42913 \begin_layout Section
42917 \begin_layout Standard
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42925 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42932 \begin_layout Section
42936 \begin_layout Standard
42937 The document font settings are described in section
42938 \begin_inset space ~
42942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42944 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42951 \begin_layout Section
42955 \begin_layout Standard
42956 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42968 \begin_inset space ~
42973 and whether it should be a
42976 \begin_inset space ~
42981 can also be specified here.
42984 \begin_layout Standard
42985 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42986 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42987 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42989 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42995 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42998 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42999 justifies the text on screen.
43000 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43004 \begin_layout Section
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43009 This dialog is described in sections
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43016 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43023 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43030 \begin_layout Section
43034 \begin_layout Standard
43035 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43036 \begin_inset space ~
43040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43042 reference "subsec:Margins"
43049 \begin_layout Section
43051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43053 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43058 \begin_inset Index idx
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43062 Language ! Encoding
43070 \begin_layout Standard
43071 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43072 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43073 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43075 is always encoded in utf8).
43076 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43077 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43078 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43079 -command is not known for
43080 a particular character).
43083 \begin_layout Standard
43084 If you use the option
43089 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43090 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43091 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43093 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43094 exactly one encoding.
43095 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43098 \begin_layout Standard
43100 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43101 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43102 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43103 installation supports Unicode), choose
43104 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43105 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43106 is quite incomplete, so
43107 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43112 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43113 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43114 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43115 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43116 -commands is not used, because all
43117 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43118 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43119 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43120 , two new alternative engines
43121 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43123 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43125 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43128 \begin_inset space ~
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43144 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43156 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43161 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43165 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43172 \begin_inset space ~
43177 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43178 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43188 The possible settings are:
43191 \begin_layout Description
43192 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43194 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43195 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43199 \begin_inset space ~
43203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43205 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43212 \begin_layout Description
43213 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43214 format you will use.
43215 In many cases this will be
43220 \begin_inset Index idx
43223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43231 If the newer package
43236 \begin_inset Index idx
43239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43241 -packages ! polyglossia
43246 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43247 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43248 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43250 this package will be used instead of
43257 \begin_layout Description
43259 \begin_inset space ~
43270 would be more appropriate.
43273 \begin_layout Description
43274 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43275 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43279 (for German texts), type in
43282 \begin_inset Newline newline
43287 usepackage{ngerman}
43290 \begin_layout Description
43291 None will not use a language package.
43292 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43295 \begin_layout Standard
43296 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43299 \begin_layout Description
43301 \begin_inset space ~
43305 \begin_inset space ~
43309 \begin_inset space ~
43316 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43322 \begin_inset Index idx
43325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 -packages ! inputenc
43333 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43334 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43335 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43339 \begin_layout Description
43340 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43342 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43343 commands, which may result in a big
43344 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43345 -commands are needed.
43348 \begin_layout Description
43350 \begin_inset space ~
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43357 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43360 \begin_layout Description
43362 \begin_inset space ~
43366 \begin_inset space ~
43369 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43372 \begin_layout Description
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43377 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43380 \begin_layout Description
43382 \begin_inset space ~
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43389 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43390 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43393 \begin_layout Description
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43399 \begin_inset space ~
43402 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43406 \begin_layout Description
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_inset space ~
43415 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43416 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43419 \begin_layout Description
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43425 \begin_inset space ~
43429 \begin_inset space ~
43432 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_layout Description
43441 \begin_inset space ~
43445 \begin_inset space ~
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43452 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43453 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43456 \begin_layout Description
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43465 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43466 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43467 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43468 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43469 \begin_inset space ~
43473 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_layout Description
43481 \begin_inset space ~
43485 \begin_inset space ~
43488 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43489 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43490 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43492 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43503 \begin_layout Description
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43509 \begin_inset space ~
43512 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43515 \begin_layout Description
43517 \begin_inset space ~
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43524 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43527 \begin_layout Description
43529 \begin_inset space ~
43533 \begin_inset space ~
43536 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43539 \begin_layout Description
43541 \begin_inset space ~
43544 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43547 \begin_layout Description
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43552 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43555 \begin_layout Description
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43564 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43567 \begin_layout Description
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_layout Description
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43588 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43591 \begin_layout Description
43593 \begin_inset space ~
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43603 \begin_layout Description
43605 \begin_inset space ~
43609 \begin_inset space ~
43612 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43618 \begin_inset Index idx
43621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43628 , when using this, set the document language to
43633 \begin_layout Description
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43639 \begin_inset space ~
43642 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43647 , when using this, set the document language to
43650 \begin_inset space ~
43656 \begin_layout Description
43658 \begin_inset space ~
43662 \begin_inset space ~
43665 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43671 \begin_inset Index idx
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43676 -packages ! japanese
43681 , when using this, set the document language to
43686 \begin_layout Description
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43695 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43700 , when using this, set the document language to
43705 \begin_layout Description
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43714 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43719 , when using this, set the document language to
43724 \begin_layout Description
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43729 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43732 \begin_layout Description
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43745 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43748 \begin_layout Description
43750 \begin_inset space ~
43754 \begin_inset space ~
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43761 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43762 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43763 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43766 \begin_layout Description
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43778 \begin_layout Description
43780 \begin_inset space ~
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43787 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43788 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43791 \begin_layout Description
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43797 \begin_inset space ~
43800 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43806 \begin_inset Index idx
43809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43816 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43819 \begin_layout Description
43821 \begin_inset space ~
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43832 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43839 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43842 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43849 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43850 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43852 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43855 \begin_layout Description
43857 \begin_inset space ~
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43864 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43870 \begin_inset Index idx
43873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43883 \begin_layout Description
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43888 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43894 \begin_inset Index idx
43897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43899 -packages ! inputenc
43905 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43909 \begin_layout Description
43911 \begin_inset space ~
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43922 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43929 \begin_layout Description
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43942 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43943 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43944 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43948 \begin_layout Description
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43954 \begin_inset space ~
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43961 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43962 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43965 \begin_layout Section
43967 \begin_inset Index idx
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43977 \begin_inset Index idx
43980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43987 \begin_inset Index idx
43990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43991 Color ! Shaded boxes
43997 \begin_inset Index idx
44000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44001 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44009 \begin_layout Standard
44010 Here you can alter the font color for the
44014 (default: black), for
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44022 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44026 (default: white) and for
44029 \begin_inset space ~
44039 sets the color back to the default.
44042 \begin_layout Standard
44043 Clicking any button showing
44051 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44052 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44053 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44054 later more quickly.
44057 \begin_layout Standard
44058 Note, if you change the
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44066 font color and use the option
44069 \begin_inset space ~
44074 in the document settings under
44077 \begin_inset space ~
44082 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44089 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44096 \begin_layout Standard
44097 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44103 \begin_layout Standard
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44116 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44122 Code after a forced page break:
44125 \begin_layout Itemize
44126 For the page color:
44127 \begin_inset Newline newline
44134 pagecolor{color name}
44137 \begin_layout Itemize
44138 For the text color:
44139 \begin_inset Newline newline
44149 \begin_layout Standard
44150 You are restricted to one of
44186 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44199 \begin_inset Newline newline
44202 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44203 names to refer to them:
44206 \begin_layout Itemize
44212 \begin_inset Newline newline
44217 page_backgroundcolor
44220 \begin_layout Itemize
44224 \begin_inset space ~
44230 \begin_inset Newline newline
44238 \begin_layout Itemize
44242 \begin_inset space ~
44248 \begin_inset Newline newline
44256 \begin_layout Itemize
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44266 \begin_inset Newline newline
44274 \begin_layout Standard
44275 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44278 \begin_inset space ~
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44294 \begin_layout Section
44298 \begin_layout Standard
44299 Here you can adjust the
44303 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44307 as described in section
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44314 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44321 \begin_layout Section
44325 \begin_layout Standard
44326 Here you can specify if a
44327 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44330 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44332 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44338 \begin_inset Index idx
44341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44343 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44345 -packages ! biblatex
44357 \begin_inset Index idx
44360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44372 \begin_inset Index idx
44375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44377 -packages ! jurabib
44384 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44385 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44387 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44392 Sectioned bibliography
44394 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44400 \begin_inset Index idx
44403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44405 -packages ! bibtopic
44411 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44413 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44418 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44420 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44424 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44431 for the generation of the bibliography.
44432 For a further description
44433 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44443 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44450 \begin_layout Section
44454 \begin_layout Standard
44455 Here you can define the
44459 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44461 \begin_inset space ~
44465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44467 reference "sec:Index"
44474 \begin_layout Section
44478 \begin_layout Standard
44479 The PDF properties are explained in section
44480 \begin_inset space ~
44484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44486 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44493 \begin_layout Section
44497 \begin_layout Standard
44498 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44499 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44505 \begin_inset Index idx
44508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44510 -packages ! amsmath
44520 \begin_inset Index idx
44523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44525 -packages ! amssymb
44535 \begin_inset Index idx
44538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 \begin_inset Index idx
44553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44565 \begin_inset Index idx
44568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44570 -packages ! mathdots
44580 \begin_inset Index idx
44583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44585 -packages ! mathtools
44595 \begin_inset Index idx
44598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44610 \begin_inset Index idx
44613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44615 -packages ! stackrel
44625 \begin_inset Index idx
44628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44630 -packages ! stmaryrd
44640 \begin_inset Index idx
44643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44645 -packages ! undertilde
44650 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44653 \begin_layout Description
44654 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44655 -errors in formulas,
44656 ensure that you have this enabled.
44659 \begin_layout Description
44660 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44661 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44662 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44666 \begin_layout Description
44667 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44670 \begin_inset space ~
44682 \begin_layout Description
44683 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44686 \begin_inset space ~
44698 \begin_layout Description
44699 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44710 \begin_layout Description
44711 mathtools is used for the math commands
44747 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44754 \begin_layout Description
44755 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44757 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44766 \begin_layout Description
44767 stackrel is used for the math command
44784 \begin_layout Description
44785 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44788 \begin_layout Description
44789 undertilde is used for the math command
44797 Accents for one Character
44806 \begin_layout Section
44810 \begin_layout Standard
44811 The float placement options are described in the section
44814 \begin_inset space ~
44822 \begin_inset space ~
44830 \begin_layout Section
44834 \begin_layout Standard
44835 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44837 Program Code Listings
44842 \begin_inset space ~
44850 \begin_layout Section
44854 \begin_layout Standard
44855 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44863 set to be used and set the
44868 The itemize environment is described in section
44869 \begin_inset space ~
44873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44875 reference "sec:Itemize"
44882 \begin_layout Standard
44883 You can furthermore specify a
44886 \begin_inset space ~
44891 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44892 command of the desired character.
44893 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44900 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44906 \begin_inset space \space{}
44910 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44920 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44921 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44924 \begin_layout Standard
44925 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44933 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44934 -packages in the preamble (menu
44937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44941 \begin_inset space ~
44947 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44951 usepackage{textcomp}
44954 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44958 usepackage{amssymb}
44968 \begin_layout Section
44972 \begin_layout Standard
44973 Branches are described in section
44974 \begin_inset space ~
44978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44980 reference "sec:Branches"
44987 \begin_layout Section
44989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44991 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44998 \begin_layout Standard
44999 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45002 \begin_layout Description
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45008 \begin_inset space ~
45011 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45031 View Master Document
45032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45039 Update Master Document
45040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45047 menu or the toolbar.
45048 The default is set in
45050 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45051 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45056 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45066 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45073 \begin_layout Description
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45082 Output settings for the menu
45084 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45086 \begin_inset space ~
45092 For a detailed description see section
45094 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45107 \begin_layout Description
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45116 Options offers settings for the export format
45124 \begin_inset space ~
45129 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45130 \begin_inset space ~
45133 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45142 settings are described in detail in section
45144 Math Output in XHTML
45149 \begin_inset space ~
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45167 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45170 \begin_layout Description
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45177 Save transient properties
45179 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45180 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45181 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45185 \begin_layout Itemize
45186 the activation of change tracking
45189 \begin_layout Itemize
45190 the output of tracked changes
45193 \begin_layout Itemize
45194 the recording of the document directory path.
45197 \begin_layout Standard
45198 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45199 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45203 \begin_layout Section
45211 \begin_layout Standard
45212 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45214 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45216 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45218 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45222 \begin_layout Standard
45223 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45224 -syntax is given in section
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45231 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45238 \begin_layout Chapter
45244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45246 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45251 \begin_inset Index idx
45254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45263 \begin_layout Standard
45264 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45266 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45270 It has the following submenus.
45273 \begin_layout Section
45277 \begin_layout Subsection
45281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45282 User Interface File
45283 \begin_inset Index idx
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45287 Customization ! of toolbars
45293 \begin_inset Index idx
45296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45297 Customization ! of menus
45305 \begin_layout Standard
45306 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45307 interface (ui) file.
45308 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45316 \begin_layout Description
45321 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45324 \begin_layout Description
45331 the menu entries in popup context menus
45334 \begin_layout Description
45339 specifies the toolbar buttons
45342 \begin_layout Standard
45343 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45344 and edit the entries.
45347 \begin_layout Standard
45348 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45360 entries must be finished with an explicit
45385 and in the case of the
45386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45398 The syntax for the entries is:
45401 \begin_layout Standard
45402 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45431 \begin_layout Standard
45433 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45436 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45437 -functions are listed in the menu
45439 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45441 \begin_inset space ~
45449 \begin_layout Standard
45450 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45456 \begin_layout Standard
45457 For example, assuming you use the menu
45459 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45462 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45466 \begin_layout Standard
45467 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45491 \begin_layout Standard
45493 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45508 to have the sixth bookmark.
45511 \begin_layout Standard
45515 \begin_inset space ~
45520 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45521 's toolbar buttons.
45522 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45523 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45526 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45538 \begin_layout Standard
45541 Enable tool tips in main work area
45543 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45551 \begin_layout Standard
45556 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45557 should display in the menu
45559 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45561 \begin_inset space ~
45569 \begin_layout Subsection
45573 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45577 \begin_layout Standard
45580 Restore window layouts and geometries
45583 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45584 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45588 \begin_layout Standard
45591 Restore cursor positions
45593 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45597 \begin_layout Standard
45600 Load opened files from last session
45602 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45606 \begin_layout Standard
45609 Clear all session information
45611 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45612 sessions (cursor positions, names
45613 of last opened documents, etc.).
45616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45620 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45625 \begin_inset Index idx
45628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45637 \begin_layout Standard
45640 Backup original documents when saving
45642 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45643 it was saved the last time.
45644 It is stored in the
45647 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45659 reference "sec:Paths"
45663 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45666 \begin_inset space ~
45672 The backup file has the file extension
45673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45687 \begin_layout Standard
45690 Backup documents, every
45692 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45695 \begin_layout Standard
45698 Save documents compressed by default
45700 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45701 \begin_inset space ~
45705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45707 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45712 This applies to newly created documents only.
45713 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45716 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45717 Windows & work area
45720 \begin_layout Standard
45723 Open documents in tabs
45725 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45729 \begin_layout Standard
45734 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45741 \begin_inset space ~
45745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45747 reference "sec:Paths"
45751 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45758 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45759 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45760 of \SpecialChar LyX
45762 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45763 instance is created for each file.
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45769 Single close-tab button
45771 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45781 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45782 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45783 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45787 \begin_layout Standard
45788 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45797 before the change takes effect.
45805 \begin_layout Standard
45810 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45812 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45814 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45818 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45819 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45820 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45823 \begin_layout Subsection
45825 \begin_inset Index idx
45828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45837 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45844 \begin_layout Standard
45845 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45849 \begin_layout Standard
45850 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 This section only deals with the fonts
45862 the \SpecialChar LyX
45864 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45868 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45879 \begin_layout Standard
45880 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45897 (depends on the system) as its
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45916 \begin_layout Standard
45917 You can change the font size with the
45924 \begin_layout Standard
45929 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45934 points have the size of 1
45935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45939 \begin_inset space ~
45943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45945 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45950 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45955 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45956 \begin_inset space ~
45960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45962 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45969 \begin_layout Standard
45972 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45974 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45975 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45976 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45977 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45978 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45980 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45981 \begin_inset space ~
45987 \begin_layout Subsection
45989 \begin_inset Index idx
45992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45993 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46000 \begin_inset Index idx
46003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 \begin_layout Standard
46013 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46014 by choosing an item in the
46015 list and selecting the
46022 \begin_layout Standard
46023 By checking the option
46027 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46030 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46035 \begin_inset space ~
46040 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46043 \begin_layout Subsection
46045 \begin_inset Index idx
46048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 \begin_layout Standard
46058 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46062 \begin_layout Standard
46067 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46068 This feature is described in section
46069 \begin_inset space ~
46073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46075 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46082 \begin_layout Standard
46083 Checking the option
46086 \begin_inset space ~
46090 \begin_inset space ~
46094 \begin_inset space ~
46099 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46102 \begin_layout Section
46104 \begin_inset Index idx
46107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46116 \begin_layout Subsection
46120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46124 \begin_layout Standard
46127 Cursor follows scrollbar
46129 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46133 \begin_layout Standard
46134 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46135 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46136 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46139 \begin_layout Standard
46142 Scroll below end of document
46144 is self-explanatory.
46147 \begin_layout Standard
46148 In \SpecialChar LyX
46149 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46156 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46158 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46159 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46162 \begin_layout Standard
46165 Sort environments alphabetically
46167 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46170 \begin_layout Standard
46173 Group environments by their category
46175 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46178 \begin_layout Standard
46183 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46198 \begin_layout Standard
46199 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46204 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46205 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46209 \begin_layout Subsection
46211 \begin_inset Index idx
46214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46221 \begin_inset Index idx
46224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 Settings ! Shortcuts
46233 \begin_layout Standard
46238 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46240 Several binding files are available, among them:
46243 \begin_layout Description
46244 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46247 \begin_layout Description
46248 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46260 \begin_layout Description
46261 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46272 \begin_layout Standard
46273 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46278 , and binding files for special languages.
46279 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46284 \begin_inset space \space{}
46288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46296 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46297 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46298 will try to use the appropriate binding
46302 \begin_layout Standard
46303 Some binding files, like
46307 , only have a limited scope.
46308 When looking at the end of the file
46312 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46315 \begin_layout Standard
46319 \begin_inset space ~
46323 \begin_inset space ~
46328 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46329 in the selected key binding file.
46332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46336 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46341 \begin_inset Index idx
46344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46345 Key Bindings ! Editing
46353 \begin_layout Standard
46354 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46355 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46356 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46357 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46360 Show key-bindings containing
46363 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46364 Insert there for example as keyword
46365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46372 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46373 functions that contain
46374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46382 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46383 All \SpecialChar LyX
46384 functions are also listed in the file
46389 that you will find in the
46396 \begin_layout Standard
46397 For example, to add the shortcut
46405 , select the function and press the
46410 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46411 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46414 \begin_layout Standard
46415 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46416 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46418 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46419 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46421 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46426 \begin_layout Standard
46427 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46430 \begin_layout Standard
46431 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46433 The syntax of the entries is:
46436 \begin_layout Standard
46442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46461 \begin_layout Subsection
46463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46465 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46470 \begin_inset Index idx
46473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46480 \begin_inset Index idx
46483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46492 \begin_layout Standard
46493 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46494 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46495 provides keyboard maps.
46496 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46497 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46500 \begin_inset space ~
46504 \begin_inset space ~
46509 and select the keyboard map file named
46516 \begin_layout Standard
46525 keyboard map and, if you use the
46529 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46532 arg "keymap-primary"
46538 arg "keymap-secondary"
46541 respectively or toggle between them with
46544 arg "keymap-toggle"
46550 \begin_layout Standard
46551 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46559 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46568 \begin_layout Standard
46569 You can also specify the mouse
46571 Wheel scrolling speed
46574 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46578 Middle mouse button pasting
46580 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46581 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46584 \begin_layout Standard
46592 \begin_inset space ~
46596 \begin_inset space ~
46601 you can select a key for zooming.
46602 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46605 \begin_layout Subsection
46609 \begin_layout Standard
46610 Input completion is described in section
46611 \begin_inset space ~
46615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46617 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46624 \begin_layout Section
46626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46633 \begin_inset Index idx
46636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46643 \begin_inset Index idx
46646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46655 \begin_layout Standard
46656 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46657 are normally determined during
46659 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46662 \begin_layout Description
46664 \begin_inset space ~
46667 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46668 's working directory.
46669 It is the default when you
46680 \begin_inset space ~
46688 \begin_layout Description
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46693 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46695 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46697 \begin_inset space ~
46701 \begin_inset space ~
46709 \begin_layout Description
46711 \begin_inset space ~
46714 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46724 \begin_inset Newline newline
46728 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46740 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46741 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46749 \begin_layout Description
46751 \begin_inset space ~
46755 \begin_inset Index idx
46758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46764 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46765 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46772 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46780 will be used to save the backups.
46781 \begin_inset Newline newline
46784 Backup files have the ending
46785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46795 \begin_layout Description
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46800 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46801 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46803 \begin_inset Newline newline
46810 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46816 You can edit this file with the program
46825 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46826 in its preferences under
46829 \begin_inset space ~
46835 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46840 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46842 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46843 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46849 and \SpecialChar LyX
46850 need to be running the same time.
46851 \begin_inset Newline newline
46854 The pipe is also used for the
46858 feature, see section
46859 \begin_inset space ~
46863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46865 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46870 \begin_inset Newline newline
46873 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46874 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46875 \begin_inset Newline newline
46891 \begin_layout Description
46893 \begin_inset space ~
46896 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46899 \begin_layout Description
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46904 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46905 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46906 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46909 \begin_layout Description
46911 \begin_inset space ~
46914 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46920 You only need to specify it if you are using
46924 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46926 For \SpecialChar LyX
46931 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46935 \begin_layout Description
46937 \begin_inset space ~
46940 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46941 When \SpecialChar LyX
46942 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46943 to find it on the system.
46944 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46946 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46955 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46956 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46959 \begin_layout Description
46961 \begin_inset space ~
46964 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46965 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46966 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46967 code or in the document
46969 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46971 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46972 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46973 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46974 scanned for the input files.
46975 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46976 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46978 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
46979 compilation may fail for some documents.
46982 \begin_layout Section
46986 \begin_layout Standard
46987 Here you can insert your
46996 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
46998 \begin_inset space ~
47002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47004 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47008 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47011 \begin_layout Section
47013 \begin_inset Index idx
47016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47017 Language ! Settings
47023 \begin_inset Index idx
47026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47027 Settings ! Language
47035 \begin_layout Subsection
47037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47039 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47046 \begin_layout Description
47048 \begin_inset space ~
47052 \begin_inset space ~
47055 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47057 You can find its actual translation status here:
47058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47060 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47068 \begin_layout Description
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47073 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47074 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47075 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47076 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47093 The most widespread language package is
47098 \begin_inset Index idx
47101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47108 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47110 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47111 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47112 come with the alternative
47118 \begin_inset Index idx
47121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47123 -packages ! polyglossia
47128 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47129 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47135 The available selections are described in section
47136 \begin_inset space ~
47140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47142 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47149 \begin_layout Description
47151 \begin_inset space ~
47154 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47155 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47156 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47157 An example is the start command
47163 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47165 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47169 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47185 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47190 \begin_layout Description
47192 \begin_inset space ~
47200 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47201 command toggles the package on and off.
47204 \begin_layout Description
47206 \begin_inset space ~
47210 \begin_inset space ~
47213 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47217 \begin_layout Description
47219 \begin_inset space ~
47223 \begin_inset space ~
47226 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47230 \begin_layout Description
47232 \begin_inset space ~
47236 \begin_inset space ~
47239 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47240 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47241 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47243 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47250 \begin_layout Description
47252 \begin_inset space ~
47255 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47257 When this option is not set, the
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47265 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47267 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47270 \begin_inset space ~
47278 \begin_layout Description
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47286 \begin_inset space ~
47292 When it is not set, the
47295 \begin_inset space ~
47300 is set to the end of the document.
47303 \begin_layout Description
47305 \begin_inset space ~
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47312 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47313 language will be underlined in blue.
47316 \begin_layout Description
47318 \begin_inset space ~
47322 \begin_inset space ~
47325 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47326 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47329 \begin_layout Description
47331 \begin_inset space ~
47334 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47335 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47336 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47337 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47340 \begin_layout Subsection
47344 \begin_layout Standard
47345 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47346 \begin_inset space ~
47350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47352 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47359 \begin_layout Section
47363 \begin_layout Subsection
47365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47367 name "subsec:General-output"
47374 \begin_layout Description
47376 \begin_inset space ~
47379 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47381 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47383 \begin_inset space ~
47389 For a detailed description see section
47391 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47404 \begin_layout Description
47406 \begin_inset space ~
47409 Options Options for the program
47413 that is used for the export format
47418 \begin_inset space ~
47422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47424 reference "subsec:Export"
47429 Possible options are listed in the
47434 \begin_inset Newline newline
47438 \begin_inset Flex URL
47441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47443 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47453 \begin_layout Description
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47459 \begin_inset space ~
47462 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47465 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47466 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47468 \begin_inset space ~
47474 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47477 \begin_layout Description
47479 \begin_inset space ~
47483 \begin_inset Index idx
47486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47493 \begin_inset Index idx
47496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47497 Settings ! Date format
47502 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47503 \begin_inset Newline newline
47507 \begin_inset Flex URL
47510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47512 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47518 \begin_inset Newline newline
47521 For example the format
47522 \begin_inset Newline newline
47526 \begin_inset Newline newline
47529 prints the date as day/month/year.
47532 \begin_layout Description
47534 \begin_inset space ~
47538 \begin_inset space ~
47541 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47542 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47545 \begin_layout Subsection
47551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47553 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47558 \begin_inset Index idx
47561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47562 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47571 \begin_layout Description
47573 \begin_inset space ~
47581 \begin_inset space ~
47585 \begin_inset space ~
47588 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47593 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47614 are used for Cyrillic.
47615 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47628 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47630 sets up in the background.
47631 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47634 \begin_layout Description
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47644 \begin_inset space ~
47648 \begin_inset space ~
47651 options They only have an effect when the program
47655 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47658 \begin_layout Standard
47659 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47660 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47661 manuals of the applications.
47664 \begin_layout Description
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47669 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47670 \begin_inset space ~
47674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47676 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47683 \begin_layout Description
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47688 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47689 \begin_inset space ~
47693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47695 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47702 \begin_layout Description
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47707 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47708 \begin_inset space ~
47712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47714 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47721 \begin_layout Description
47727 \begin_inset space ~
47730 command Command for the program
47732 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47735 that is described in the section
47737 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47742 Additional Features
47747 \begin_layout Standard
47748 There are additionally the following options:
47751 \begin_layout Description
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47761 \begin_inset space ~
47765 \begin_inset space ~
47770 \begin_inset space ~
47773 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47791 to separate folders.
47792 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47794 \begin_inset Index idx
47797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47804 \begin_inset Index idx
47807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47816 \begin_layout Description
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47834 \begin_inset space ~
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47841 changes Removes all manually set
47847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47848 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47850 \begin_inset space ~
47855 dialog when changing the document class.
47858 \begin_layout Section
47860 \begin_inset space ~
47864 \begin_inset Index idx
47867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47876 \begin_layout Subsection
47878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47880 name "subsec:Converters"
47885 \begin_inset Index idx
47888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47897 \begin_layout Standard
47898 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47899 from one format to another.
47900 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47901 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47908 \begin_inset space ~
47913 field and press the
47918 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47927 drop-down list, modify the
47931 field and press the
47938 \begin_layout Standard
47941 Converter File Cache
47947 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47949 Maximum Age (in days
47952 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47953 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47956 \begin_layout Standard
47957 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47958 definition, is described in the section
47969 \begin_layout Subsection
47971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47973 name "sec:File-Formats"
47978 \begin_inset Index idx
47981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47988 \begin_inset Index idx
47991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48000 \begin_layout Standard
48001 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48011 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48014 \begin_layout Standard
48015 You can also define the
48017 Default output format
48019 that is used when you use
48021 View, Update, View Master Document
48025 Update Master Document
48031 menu or the toolbar.
48034 \begin_layout Standard
48035 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48046 \begin_layout Standard
48047 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48049 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48050 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48051 This is done by specifying a
48056 More about this is described in the section
48067 \begin_layout Chapter
48068 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48070 \begin_inset Index idx
48073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48082 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48089 \begin_layout Standard
48091 \begin_inset space ~
48095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48097 reference "tab:Units"
48101 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48102 and used in this documentation.
48105 \begin_layout Standard
48106 \begin_inset Float table
48112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48113 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48131 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48139 \begin_inset Tabular
48140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48141 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48350 scaled point (65536
48351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48429 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48502 % of original image width
48507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48818 \begin_layout Chapter
48820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48822 name "chap:Credits"
48829 \begin_layout Standard
48830 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48831 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48834 \begin_layout Itemize
48837 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48840 \begin_layout Itemize
48846 \begin_layout Itemize
48852 \begin_layout Itemize
48858 \begin_layout Itemize
48864 \begin_layout Itemize
48870 \begin_layout Itemize
48876 \begin_layout Itemize
48882 \begin_layout Itemize
48885 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48888 \begin_layout Itemize
48894 \begin_layout Itemize
48900 \begin_layout Itemize
48906 \begin_layout Itemize
48912 \begin_layout Itemize
48918 \begin_layout Itemize
48924 \begin_layout Itemize
48930 \begin_layout Itemize
48936 \begin_layout Itemize
48937 The \SpecialChar LyX
48939 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48949 \begin_layout Standard
48950 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48953 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48960 \begin_layout Bibliography
48961 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48962 LatexCommand bibitem
48969 The \SpecialChar LyX
48971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48974 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48980 \begin_inset Newline newline
48984 \begin_inset Flex URL
48987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48989 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48997 \begin_layout Bibliography
48998 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48999 LatexCommand bibitem
49000 key "latexcompanion"
49005 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49007 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49008 Companion Second Edition.
49011 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49014 \begin_layout Bibliography
49015 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49016 LatexCommand bibitem
49022 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49025 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49029 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49032 \begin_layout Bibliography
49033 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49034 LatexCommand bibitem
49043 : A Document Preparation System.
49046 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49049 \begin_layout Bibliography
49050 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49051 LatexCommand bibitem
49061 The \SpecialChar TeX
49065 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49068 \begin_layout Bibliography
49069 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49070 LatexCommand bibitem
49076 The \SpecialChar TeX
49078 \begin_inset Newline newline
49082 \begin_inset Flex URL
49085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49087 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49095 \begin_layout Bibliography
49096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49097 LatexCommand bibitem
49103 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49105 \begin_inset Newline newline
49109 \begin_inset Flex URL
49112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49114 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49122 \begin_layout Bibliography
49123 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49124 LatexCommand bibitem
49131 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49133 name "Documentation"
49134 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49141 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49145 \begin_inset Newline newline
49149 \begin_inset Flex URL
49152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49154 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49162 \begin_layout Bibliography
49163 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49164 LatexCommand bibitem
49171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49173 name "Documentation"
49174 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49179 how to use the program
49181 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49185 \begin_inset Newline newline
49189 \begin_inset Flex URL
49192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49194 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49202 \begin_layout Bibliography
49203 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49204 LatexCommand bibitem
49211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49214 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49219 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49225 \begin_inset Index idx
49228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49230 -packages ! biblatex
49236 \begin_inset Newline newline
49240 \begin_inset Flex URL
49243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49245 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49253 \begin_layout Bibliography
49254 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49255 LatexCommand bibitem
49262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49264 name "Documentation"
49265 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49275 \begin_inset Newline newline
49279 \begin_inset Flex URL
49282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49284 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49292 \begin_layout Bibliography
49293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49294 LatexCommand bibitem
49295 key "makeindex-man"
49301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49304 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49314 \begin_inset Newline newline
49318 \begin_inset Flex URL
49321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49323 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49331 \begin_layout Bibliography
49332 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49333 LatexCommand bibitem
49340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49342 name "Documentation"
49343 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49353 \begin_inset Newline newline
49357 \begin_inset Flex URL
49360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49362 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49370 \begin_layout Bibliography
49371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49372 LatexCommand bibitem
49379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49381 name "Documentation"
49382 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49387 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49389 \begin_inset Newline newline
49393 \begin_inset Flex URL
49396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49398 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49406 \begin_layout Bibliography
49407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49408 LatexCommand bibitem
49415 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49417 name "Documentation"
49418 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49423 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49429 \begin_inset Index idx
49432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49434 -packages ! caption
49440 \begin_inset Newline newline
49444 \begin_inset Flex URL
49447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49449 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49457 \begin_layout Bibliography
49458 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49459 LatexCommand bibitem
49466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49468 name "Documentation"
49469 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49474 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49480 \begin_inset Index idx
49483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49485 -packages ! enumitem
49491 \begin_inset Newline newline
49495 \begin_inset Flex URL
49498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49500 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49508 \begin_layout Bibliography
49509 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49510 LatexCommand bibitem
49517 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49519 name "Documentation"
49520 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49525 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49531 \begin_inset Index idx
49534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49536 -packages ! fancyhdr
49542 \begin_inset Newline newline
49546 \begin_inset Flex URL
49549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49551 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49559 \begin_layout Bibliography
49560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49561 LatexCommand bibitem
49568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49570 name "Documentation"
49571 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49576 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49582 \begin_inset Index idx
49585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49587 -packages ! hyperref
49593 \begin_inset Newline newline
49597 \begin_inset Flex URL
49600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49602 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49610 \begin_layout Bibliography
49611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49612 LatexCommand bibitem
49619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49621 name "Documentation"
49622 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49627 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49633 \begin_inset Index idx
49636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49638 -packages ! nomencl
49644 \begin_inset Newline newline
49648 \begin_inset Flex URL
49651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49653 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49661 \begin_layout Bibliography
49662 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49663 LatexCommand bibitem
49670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49672 name "Documentation"
49673 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49678 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49684 \begin_inset Index idx
49687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49689 -packages ! prettyref
49695 \begin_inset Newline newline
49699 \begin_inset Flex URL
49702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49704 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49712 \begin_layout Bibliography
49713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49714 LatexCommand bibitem
49721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49723 name "Documentation"
49724 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49729 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49735 \begin_inset Index idx
49738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49740 -packages ! refstyle
49746 \begin_inset Newline newline
49750 \begin_inset Flex URL
49753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49755 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49763 \begin_layout Bibliography
49764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49765 LatexCommand bibitem
49772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49775 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49780 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49782 \begin_inset Newline newline
49786 \begin_inset Flex URL
49789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49791 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49799 \begin_layout Bibliography
49800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49801 LatexCommand bibitem
49808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49811 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49816 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49818 \begin_inset Newline newline
49822 \begin_inset Flex URL
49825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49827 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49835 \begin_layout Bibliography
49836 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49837 LatexCommand bibitem
49844 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49847 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49852 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49853 for Cyrillic languages:
49854 \begin_inset Newline newline
49858 \begin_inset Flex URL
49861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49863 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49871 \begin_layout Bibliography
49872 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49873 LatexCommand bibitem
49880 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49883 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49888 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49890 \begin_inset Newline newline
49894 \begin_inset Flex URL
49897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49899 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49907 \begin_layout Bibliography
49908 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49909 LatexCommand bibitem
49916 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49919 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49924 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49926 \begin_inset Newline newline
49930 \begin_inset Flex URL
49933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49935 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49943 \begin_layout Bibliography
49944 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49945 LatexCommand bibitem
49952 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49955 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
49960 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49962 \begin_inset Newline newline
49966 \begin_inset Flex URL
49969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49971 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
49979 \begin_layout Bibliography
49980 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49981 LatexCommand bibitem
49988 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49991 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
49996 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49998 \begin_inset Newline newline
50002 \begin_inset Flex URL
50005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50007 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50015 \begin_layout Bibliography
50016 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50017 LatexCommand bibitem
50024 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50027 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50032 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50034 \begin_inset Newline newline
50038 \begin_inset Flex URL
50041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50043 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50051 \begin_layout Bibliography
50052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50053 LatexCommand bibitem
50060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50063 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50068 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50070 \begin_inset Newline newline
50074 \begin_inset Flex URL
50077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50079 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50087 \begin_layout Bibliography
50088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50089 LatexCommand bibitem
50096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50099 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50104 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50106 \begin_inset Newline newline
50110 \begin_inset Flex URL
50113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50115 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50123 \begin_layout Bibliography
50124 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50125 LatexCommand bibitem
50132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50135 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50140 about new features in
50146 \begin_inset Newline newline
50150 \begin_inset Flex URL
50153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50155 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50163 \begin_layout Standard
50164 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50198 \begin_inset Note Note
50201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50208 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50209 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50210 bibliography is the second one:
50218 \begin_layout Standard
50219 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50220 LatexCommand bibtex
50221 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50222 options "biblio/alphadin"
50229 \begin_layout Standard
50230 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50234 \begin_layout Standard
50235 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50236 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50242 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50243 LatexCommand printindex